doc 1

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@77 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

10 files changed, 7572 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d5ff970dd43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/README
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+READ.ME for AMS-TeX version 2.2                             2001/08/29
+
+AMS-TeX is a macro package that works with the TeX typesetting program.
+A working TeX system is a prerequisite for using any of the components
+of AMS-TeX.  [TeX is not an AMS product; see the AMS TeX Resources page
+(http://www.ams.org/tex/tex-resources.html) for information if you
+do not already have TeX.]
+
+Obtain a printed copy of the full installation instructions:
+ - Process amstinst.tex with Plain TeX, or
+ - Print the amstinst.ps file provided.
+Read the instructions; they are much more complete than the summary
+provided here.
+
+The instructions assume that your TeX system is arranged according to
+the recommended TeX Directory Structure (TDS).  Check the documentation
+for your TeX system to find out if it uses the TDS.  A copy of the TDS
+report can be found at CTAN either as an online document
+    .../tds/standard/tds
+or as a printable pdf file
+    .../tds/standard/tds/tds.pdf
+Items on CTAN can usually be found through the CTAN Catalogue:
+    http://www.ctan.org/search
+
+
+FILES IN THE AMS-TeX DISTRIBUTION
+
+A complete list of the files contained in the distribution is included
+in the installation instructions (amstinst).
+
+There are two basic methods of obtaining the files needed for AMS-TeX:
+ - Retrieve one of the AMS-TeX bundles from the AMS FTP server
+    ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/
+   or the AMS web site
+    http://www.ams.org/tex/amstex.html
+ - Retrieve the individual files from one of the AMS servers or from CTAN
+    .../macros/amstex/
+Install these files as described in the installation instructions
+(amstinst); a summary appears below, under INSTALLING AMS-TeX.
+
+Also, AMS-TeX will call for AMSFonts.  Check the tfm-files subdirectory
+    TEXMF/fonts/tfm/ams/
+to see whether it is already populated (most TeX distributions now
+include the AMSFonts).  If not, retrieve the .tfm files for AMSFonts 2.2
+and install them into your system tfm-files subdirectory.
+
+These .tfm files can be retrieved in several ways:
+ - as a bundle from the AMSFonts page on the AMS web site at
+    http://www.ams.org/tex/amsfonts.html
+ - as a tfm.tar file in the /pub/tex directory at the AMS FTP site,
+    ftp://ftp.ams.org
+ - as individual .tfm files from the /pub/tex/amsfonts/tfm subdirectory
+   at the AMS FTP site or from CTAN in .../fonts/amsfonts/tfm
+(Note: set the file type to binary in FTP when transferring .tfm files.)
+Even if you do not use any symbols from the AMSFonts, you will need at
+least the .tfm files to use amsppt.sty and to TeX the accompanying
+documentation for AMS-TeX.
+
+The following documentation files will be useful in installing and using
+AMS-TeX.
+
+amstinst.tex -  Installation instructions, comprising Appendices B and C
+amstinst.ps     of amsguide, provided as both TeX source and ready-to-print
+                PostScript.
+amsguide.tex -  The AMS-TeX User's Guide, provided as both TeX source and
+amsguide.ps     a ready-to-print PostScript file.  When you have completed
+                the installation of AMS-TeX 2.2, process the .tex file using
+                AMS-TeX 2.2 and print the resulting .dvi file.  The output
+                will be a brief guide to using AMS-TeX 2.2, supplementing
+                The Joy of TeX.
+joyerr.tex   -  The TeX input file for a document listing errata to
+                The Joy of TeX prior to AMS-TeX 2.0. It also should be
+                run through TeX using AMS-TeX 2.2.
+joyerr2.tex  -  The TeX input file for a document listing errata to the
+                second edition of The Joy of TeX, for AMS-TeX 2.1 and up.
+                Process with AMS-TeX 2.2 as for the other .tex files.
+amsppt.doc   -  Technical documentation for amsppt.sty, including an update
+                history.
+amsppt.faq   -  Frequently asked questions and answers regarding AMS-TeX
+                and amsppt.sty.
+
+
+INSTALLING AMS-TeX 2.2 ON YOUR SYSTEM -- A BRIEF OVERVIEW
+
+Backup any existing AMS-TeX files before installing a new release.
+
+Read the instructions in amstinst; they are more complete than these notes.
+
+If you have retrieved a bundled distribution and unbundled it with the
+appropriate tool, the files will be placed into the following subdirectories:
+
+    TEXMF/doc/ams/amstex
+    TEXMF/source/amstex
+    TEXMF/tex/amstex/base
+    TEXMF/tex/plain/amsfonts
+
+If you have retrieved individual files, you will need to place them into
+subdirectories as described in amstinst.ps.
+
+AMS-TeX will call for the AMSFonts 2.2 .tfm files.  Check for their
+presence on your system and, if necessary, retrieve them and place them
+in the proper location as described above.
+
+Remember that most TDS sytems operate using a filename list or database,
+which must be updated when new files are added; consult your TeX system
+documentation for update instructions.
+
+Run amstex.ini through INITEX (the version of TeX which has no format
+preloaded, distributed with your implementation of TeX). It will produce
+a format file which will function as a preloaded version of AMS-TeX.
+Place this format file in the directory where your implementation of
+TeX looks for format files (see your system documentation), refresh the
+filename database, and you are ready to use AMS-TeX 2.2.
+
+If you habitually use the AMSPPT documentstyle, you may prefer to
+include it in the format file you create. This can be done by editing
+the file amstex.ini, using any text editor, and uncommenting the line
+that reads "\documentstyle{amsppt}".  Before creating the format file,
+read Appendix C from the installation instructions.
+
+We recommend that, as a first test of your installation, you run the
+file amsguide.tex through TeX, and print out the output. This will
+provide further information about using AMS-TeX.
+
+========================================================================
+Highlights of the differences between versions 2.1 and 2.2:
+
+AMSTEX.TEX
+----------
+
+---Removed copyright notice and restriction from message printed on
+   terminal and in log for every run.
+
+AMSPPT.STY
+----------
+(See the user's guide (amsguide.tex) and amsppt.doc, section 20, for
+full details.)
+
+---\subjclass was updated to use \subjclassyear as the date for the
+Mathematics Subject Classification scheme. (NOTE: THIS CHANGE IS NOT
+BACKWARD COMPATIBLE.  EXISTING DOCUMENT FILES NEED NOT BE MODIFIED BUT
+THE OUTPUT WILL BE DIFFERENT IF CLASSIFICATION WAS OLDER THAN 1991.)
+
+========================================================================
+Highlights of the differences between versions 2.0 and 2.1:
+
+AMSTEX.TEX
+----------
+---Improvements to the mechanisms for loading various fonts in
+the AMSFonts package. For example, \loadeusm now defines a
+\eusm command that can be used like \roman or \bold.
+
+---Revamped \printoptions command.
+
+---Some internal cleanup to reduce memory usage in some of TeX's
+memory categories (notably hash size).
+
+---Informational messages appear on screen identifying the
+modules within amstex.tex during the creation of a format file.
+
+AMSPPT.STY
+----------
+(See the user's guide (amsguide.tex) and amsppt.doc, sections 18 and 19,
+for full details.)
+
+---\curraddr was added, for giving the current address of an author,
+if different from the address given in \address.
+
+---\rom was added, for preventing unwanted italicization of certain
+things, such as parentheses or numbers, in theorems and other italic
+passages.  \rom automatically inserts italic corrections.
+
+---The implementation of \nofrills was completely changed, to provide
+better error messages for a missing or misspelled \endkeywords or
+similar end command when reading a delimited argument.
+
+---Multiple \thanks commands in the top matter will now produce
+multiple acknowledgment footnotes instead of discarding all but the
+last one.
+
+---A period is no longer added automatically at the end of a
+\thanks. (NOTE: THIS CHANGE IS NOT BACKWARD COMPATIBLE---DOCUMENT
+FILES WILL HAVE TO BE MODIFIED.)
+
+---\subjclassyear was added to specify the year of the Mathematics
+Subject Classification scheme.  Only 1991 and 2000 are recognized,
+defaulting to 1991 to maintain some backward compatibility.
+
+---\widestnumber\item now works as claimed in the User's Guide.
+
+---The missing \par in the internal command \penaltyandskip@ was added.
+
+---Additional checks were added for runaway \proclaim, \definition,
+\ref, \roster, etc.  The internal macro \runaway@ was changed to make
+its usage more consistent and robust; in the process its name was
+changed to \add@missing (and as the name suggests, it now tries to
+recover by adding the missing \end... command).
+
+---As with amstex.tex, informational messages were added identifying the
+modules within amsppt.sty.
+
+---The bibliography macros were substantially modified to correct
+another longstanding bug: line breaks after explicit hyphens,
+mathbins, and mathrels were inhibited. This also involved changing the
+\ref-specific version of \nofrills.  BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY (WITH
+VERSION 2.0) IS NOT COMPLETE WITH RESPECT TO \nofrills IN THE
+BIBLIOGRAPHY MACROS.  \nofrills NOW SHOULD ALWAYS FOLLOW IMMEDIATELY
+AFTER THE NAME OF THE FIELD TO WHICH IT APPLIES, E.G., \transl\nofrills,
+OR \paper\nofrills. This is more consistent with the usage of \nofrills
+outside of the references section. \nofrills will cause all the "frills",
+such as the parentheses around years in journal article citations, or
+words like "eds." or "vol." that are supplied automatically, to be
+omitted for the given field.  In addition, it will suppress the
+automatic punctuation at the end of the field, if any.
+
+---A \refstyle command was added to allow users to specify one of the
+three different reference styles most commonly used in AMS publications:
+letter labels in square brackets; unnumbered; and numbered (denoted A,
+B, and C, respectively). The syntax is "\refstyle{A}" (immediately after
+the \documentstyle command). Style C, numbered with arabic numerals, is
+the default selected by amsppt.sty.  The \refstyle command ensures 
+proper correspondence between the formatting of cites in the main text 
+and the formatting of the references section. Also, \key can now be used
+for all reference labels, and the \no command is redundant (though still
+supported, for backward compatibility).
+
+---\miscnote was added, and used in the implementation of \toappear,
+so that \toappear and \finalinfo would not be mutually exclusive.
+\miscnote might also be used for things like "preprint" or
+"submitted".  Unlike \finalinfo, \miscnote automatically adds
+parentheses.
+
+---\procinfo was added, to give place and date where the meeting
+took place, for a proceedings volume reference.
+
+---\eds or \ed information will now be used in place of an author's
+name, if \by is absent.  This would be for collections or proceedings
+volumes that are cited as a whole, instead of citing a single paper
+within the volume.
+
+AMSTEX.INI
+----------
+File to make format file creation more convenient. See the
+user's guide and/or installation notes above.
+
+AMSPPT1.TEX
+-----------
+Compatibility file to allow processing of AMS-TeX 1.1 and earlier
+documents under AMS-TeX 2.0+. See the user's guide.
+
+
+(NOTE:  Author packages for use with AMS-TeX are available from the AMS
+web site at http://www.ams.org/tex/author-info.html, or by FTP from
+ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/author-info/packages.  All packages are compatible
+with AMS-TeX 2.2.  If you have previously received an AMS-TeX author
+package for use with an earlier version of AMS-TeX, for best results you
+should retrieve an upgraded copy from the AMS server.)
+
+========================================================================
+
+Questions or comments can be directed to:
+
+Technical Support
+American Mathematical Society
+201 Charles Street
+P.O. Box 6248
+Providence, RI 02940   USA
+     (800) 321-4AMS (321-4267) ext. 4080 (U.S. and Canada)
+     (401) 455-4080
+Email:  tech-support@ams.org
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsguide.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3ba1747149f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsguide.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1219dc1d6df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,2098 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @TeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "amsguide.tex",
+%%%   version   = "2.2",
+%%%   date      = "2001/08/07",
+%%%   time      = "16:41:48 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "38601 2098 10156 78439",
+%%%   filetype  = "AMS-TeX: user documentation",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 2001 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                    including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                    to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%%                P. O. Box 6248,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02940,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   keywords  = "amstex, ams-tex, tex",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   abstract  = "This file is the User's Guide describing the use of
+%%%                AMS-TeX 2.2.  Installation instructions are found
+%%%                in appendix B, in file amstinst.tex.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 checksum
+%%%                as the first value, followed by the equivalent of
+%%%                the standard UNIX wc (word count) utility output of
+%%%                lines, words, and characters.  This is produced by
+%%%                Robert Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+%      In addition to plain TeX and standard CM fonts, TeXing this file
+%      requires the following files and fonts:
+%
+% amstex.tex (version 2.1 or later)
+% amsppt.sty (version 2.1 or later)
+% amsppt.sti (version 2.1 or later)
+% amssym.tex
+% msam10
+% msbm10
+% eufm10
+% cmex7
+% cmex8
+% cmbsy7
+% cmcsc8
+% amstinst.tex (Appendices B and C to this User's Guide)
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\input amstex
+\documentstyle{amsppt}
+
+\define\GuideVersion{2.2}
+\define\GuideDate{August 2001}
+
+\font\tenss=cmss10
+
+\long\def\usertype#1{\smallskip
+  \moveright2pc\vbox{\def\par{\crcr}\halign{%
+    \setbox0\hbox{\tt##}%
+    \hbox\ifdim\wd0<10pc to10pc\fi{\unhbox0\hfil}%
+    \kern1pc \it $\langle$return$\rangle$\hss
+    \cr#1\crcr}}%
+  \smallskip}
+\long\def\systype#1{{\rightskip=4pc\leftskip=4pc\noindent\tt #1\par}}
+
+%      Change default dimensions and fonts
+\pageheight{49pc}
+\dropfoliodepth=2pc
+\hfuzz1pc % to suppress reporting of slightly overfull boxes.
+\aboveheadskip=2\bigskipamount
+\belowheadskip=\medskipamount
+\subheadskip=\bigskipamount
+\addto\tenpoint{\abovedisplayskip=6pt plus2pt minus3pt
+    \belowdisplayskip=\abovedisplayskip}
+\loadbold
+%      Prevent hyphenation of "amsppt":
+\hyphenation{amsppt}
+
+%      Macros for text substitution and for presentation of examples.
+%
+\define\Textures{{\it Textures\/}}
+\define\AMS{American Mathematical Society}
+\define\JAMS{{\it Journal of the \AMS}}
+\define\JoT{{\it The Joy of \TeX{}}}
+\define\Joy{{\it Joy}}
+
+\def\filnam#1{{\tt\ignorespaces#1\unskip}}
+\hyphenchar\tentt=-1 % to prohibit hyphenation in tt text
+
+\newdimen\exindent   \exindent=2\parindent
+% Add a high penalty to discourage line breaks within an example
+% without absolutely prohibiting them.
+{\obeylines
+ \gdef^^M{\par\penalty9999}%
+ \gdef\beginexample#1{\medskip\bgroup %
+   \def~{\char`\~}%
+   \NoBlackBoxes\tt\frenchspacing %
+   \parindent=0pt#1\leftskip=\exindent\obeylines}
+}%  end \obeylines
+\def\endexample{\endgraf\egroup\medskip}
+\newdimen\exboxwidth
+\exboxwidth=3in
+\def\exbox#1#2{\noindent \hangindent=\exboxwidth
+  \leavevmode\llap{\null\rm#1\unskip\enspace}%
+  \hbox to\exboxwidth{\tt\ignorespaces#2\hss}\rm\ignorespaces}
+\chardef\\=`\\       \chardef\{=`\{       \chardef\}=`\}
+\def\<#1>{{\it$\langle$#1\/$\rangle$}}
+\def\Dimen{\<dimen>}
+
+\catcode`\@=11
+\def\cs#1{\leavevmode
+%      Save the previous skip and put it back after the penalty 0
+%      so that the penalty0 won't cause a blank at the end of a line.
+  \skip@\lastskip\unskip\penalty\z@
+  \ifdim\skip@>\z@ \hskip\skip@\fi
+  {\tt\char`\\\ignorespaces#1\unskip}}
+
+%  Redefine the \subhead macro to be on a line by itself and omit period.
+\outer\def\subhead#1\endsubhead{\par\penaltyandskip@{-100}\subheadskip
+  \noindent{\subheadfont@\ignorespaces#1\unskip\endgraf}\nobreak\noindent}
+
+%  Define macros for presentation of tables of symbols.
+\def\BBB#1{\par\bigbreak
+  \leavevmode\llap{$\bullet$\enspace}{\bf#1}}
+\newdimen\biggest
+\setbox0\hbox{$\dashrightarrow$}\biggest=\wd0
+\def\1#1{\hbox to\biggest{\hfill$\csname#1\endcsname$\hfill}\ \ %
+  \cs{#1}}
+\def\fudge{\hbox to\biggest{}\ \ \hphantom{\tt\char'134 }}
+
+\def\getID@#1{\edef\next@{\expandafter\meaning\csname#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\getID@@\next@0\getID@@}
+\def\getID@@#1"#2#3#4#5#6\getID@@{\def\next@{#6}%
+  \edef\msafam@{\the\msafam}\edef\msbfam@{\the\msbfam}%
+  \ifx\next@\empty
+   \edef\next@{\number"#2}%
+    \ifx\next@\msafam@
+     \def\ID@{10#3#4}%
+    \else
+     \ifx\next@\msbfam@
+      \def\ID@{20#3#4}%
+     \else\message{Invalid family IDs for msam/msbm fonts, path 2}%
+    \fi\fi
+  \else
+   \edef\next@{\number"#3}%
+    \ifx\next@\msafam@
+     \def\ID@{1#2#4#5}%
+    \else
+     \ifx\next@\msbfam@
+      \def\ID@{2#2#4#5}%
+     \else\message{Invalid family IDs for msam/msbm fonts, path 3}%
+    \fi\fi
+  \fi}
+\def\2#1{\hbox to.5\hsize
+  {\hbox to\biggest{\hfill$\csname#1\endcsname$\hfill}\ \ %
+    \getID@{#1}{\tt\ID@}\ \ \cs{#1}\hfill}}
+\def\3#1#2{\hbox to.5\hsize
+  {\hbox to\biggest{\hfil$\csname#1\endcsname$\hfil}\ \ %
+    \getID@{#1}{\tt\ID@}\ \ \cs{#1}, \cs{#2}\hss}}
+\def\4#1{\hbox to.5\hsize
+  {\hbox to\biggest{\hfill$\csname#1\endcsname$\hfill}\ \ %
+    \getID@{#1}{\tt\ID@}\ \ \cs{#1}\ \ {\eightpoint(U)}\hfill}}
+
+\catcode`\@=\active
+
+\define\thismonth{\ifcase\month % case 0 --- impossible!
+  \or January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June%
+  \or July\or August\or September\or October\or November%
+  \or December\fi}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% TITLE PAGE
+
+%  Quarantine the large fonts used for the title page
+\begingroup
+\font\fourtn=cmr10 scaled \magstep2
+\font\fourtnsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+\font\fourtnbf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep3
+\textfont2=\fourtnsy
+
+\shipout\vbox to\vsize{%
+\parindent=0pt
+\vskip5pc
+\rightline{\fourtnbf User's Guide to \AmSTeX{}}
+\bigskip
+\rightline{\fourtn Version \GuideVersion}
+\medskip
+\rightline{\fourtn \GuideDate}
+%\rightline{\fourtn {\thismonth} {\number\year}}
+
+\vfill
+
+\tenpoint
+
+This publication was typeset using \AmSTeX{}, the American
+Mathematical\newline \quad Society's \TeX{} macro system.
+
+Copyright \copyright{} 2001 by the \AMS{}.
+
+All rights reserved. Any material in this guide may be reproduced or
+duplicated for personal or educational use.
+
+\medskip
+\begingroup\obeylines
+\TeX{} is a trademark of the \AMS{}.
+\endgroup
+}% End of vbox being shipped out
+\endgroup
+
+%% END TITLE PAGE
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\topmatter
+\title\nofrills User's Guide to \AmSTeX{} Version 2.2\endtitle
+
+%\date {\thismonth} {\number\year}\enddate
+\date \GuideDate\enddate
+
+\toc
+\widestnumber\head{7}
+\head 1. Overview\endhead
+\head 2. Formatting Features\endhead
+\head 3. Mathematical Constructions\endhead
+\head 4. Fonts\endhead
+\head 5. Symbol Names\endhead
+\head 6. Other Things You Ought to Know\endhead
+\head 7. Getting Help\endhead
+\head {} References\endhead
+\head {} Appendix A. Sample Bibliography Input and Output\endhead
+\head {} Appendix B. Installation Procedures\endhead
+\head {} Appendix C. Before Installing \AmSTeX: Facts About Fonts\endhead
+\endtoc
+
+\endtopmatter
+\document
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\head 1. Overview\endhead
+
+\AmSTeX{} is a macro package for \TeX{}, designed to simplify the input
+of mathematical material and format the output according to preset style
+specifications.  Although the \AMS{} holds the copyright for \AmSTeX{},
+its use is not restricted, but is encouraged for the preparation of
+manuscripts intended for publication both in the Society's books and
+journals, and also in other mathematical literature.
+
+Version 2.0 of \AmSTeX{} was released in 1990, concurrent with the
+publication of the second edition of \JoT{}.  It contained numerous
+minor improvements and bug fixes, as well as some major changes
+involving additional fonts.  Version 2.1 was first released in 1991;
+interim updates are identified by changes in release date.  The present
+version 2.2 was released in August 2001. This User's Guide describes all
+the new and changed features from these versions and how to use them,
+with further additions and revisions pertaining to the current release.
+Topics are grouped by type, and then presented in roughly the same order
+as they appear in \JoT{}.
+
+This User's Guide assumes that you already have a copy of \JoT{}. It
+contains references to specific sections that won't help you much if you
+don't have a copy. It also assumes for the most part that you will be
+using the ``preprint style'', a set of macros that provides features
+specific to the formatting of a document, such as headings, page
+numbers, and the like. If you are planning to use the preprint style,
+you will also need to have a copy of AMSFonts Version~2.2.  \JoT{} and
+AMSFonts 2.2 are available from the \AMS{} and other distributors.
+
+\subhead Files Comprising the \AmSTeX{} Version~2.2 package
+\endsubhead
+
+The following files are contained in the \AmSTeX{} Version~2.2 package
+distributed by the \AMS{}:
+\medskip
+\settabs\+\indent&\filnam{amsguide.tex}\qquad&\kern.6\hsize\cr
+\+&\filnam{amstex.tex}&
+       the \AmSTeX{} Version 2.2 macros\cr
+\+&\filnam{amstex.bug}&
+       a chronicle of bug fixes to \filnam{amstex.tex} and
+       \filnam{amsppt.sty},\cr
+\+&&   as well as known open bugs\cr
+\+&\filnam{amssym.tex}&
+       macros defining the symbols in fonts \filnam{msam} and
+       \filnam{msbm}\cr
+\+&\filnam{amsppt.sty}&
+       the preprint style for \AmSTeX{} Version 2.2\cr
+\+&\filnam{amsppt.sti}&
+       initialization options for the \AmSTeX{} 2.2 preprint style\cr
+\+&\filnam{amsppt.doc}&
+       technical documentation for \filnam{amsppt.sty}\cr
+\+&\filnam{amsppt.faq}&
+       some frequently asked questions and answers about \AmSTeX{}\cr
+\+&\filnam{amsguide.tex}&
+       the source file for this User's Guide\cr
+\+&\filnam{amstinst.tex}&
+       the source file for Installation Procedures;\cr
+\+&&   appendices to this User's Guide\cr
+\+&\filnam{amsppt1.tex}&
+       a backward compatibility file for use with documents\cr
+\+&&   already completed using \AmSTeX{} versions earlier than 2.0\cr
+\+&\filnam{joyerr.tex}&
+       errata to \JoT{} (first edition)\cr
+\+&\filnam{joyerr2.tex}&
+       errata to \JoT{} (second edition)\cr
+\+&\filnam{amstex.ini}&
+       used in creating format files\cr
+\medskip
+
+The file \filnam{amsppt.doc} is an {\smc ascii} file, and is
+not intended to be processed with \TeX{}\null.  This  documentation file
+is arranged in the same order as the macro file that it describes, and
+explains the intent and mechanics of the macros in detail.  A separate
+file (\filnam{amstex.doc}), documenting the file \filnam{amstex.tex},
+is available on request.
+
+In addition, other files are used during installation.
+For instructions on installing the \AmSTeX{} macros and preprint style,
+see Appendix B\null.  This appendix describes the installation process
+for \TeX{} systems based on the \TeX{} Directory Structure (TDS), and
+also gives suggestions for installation on other systems.
+
+\subhead General Description of Changes\endsubhead
+
+\AmSTeX{} 2.0+, the preprint style, and their technical
+documentation are the result of a joint effort begun by Michael Spivak
+and extended by the Composition Technical Support group of the \AMS{}.
+
+In version 2.0 of \AmSTeX{}, the following changes were made:
+\widestnumber\item{10}
+\roster
+\item All known bugs were eliminated.
+\item Messages were added identifying the current versions of
+  \filnam{amstex.tex} and \filnam{amsppt.sty}, to be displayed on your
+  terminal screen and in the log file.
+\item Some error and help messages were changed for the sake of
+  clarity or to provide more information.
+\item Refinements were made to conserve memory space.
+\item The CM versions of the Computer Modern fonts were substituted for the
+  older AM versions.
+\item Support for additional fonts was added.
+
+  \itemitem{(a)} \filnam{amstex.tex} provides the mechanism for accessing
+    the Euler and extra symbol fonts of the AMSFonts collection.
+  \itemitem{(b)} The preprint style assumes that fonts \filnam{msam},
+    \filnam{msbm}, and \filnam{eufm} are installed and available.
+
+\item Changes were made to the preprint style to make it conform
+  more closely to the style of AMS publications, in particular, the \JAMS.
+
+  \itemitem{(a)} Running heads were made automatic; they can be suppressed
+    if desired.
+  \itemitem{(b)} Additional elements are recognized in both the top matter
+    and the body of a document, and the input syntax was regularized.
+  \itemitem{(c)} Footnotes were changed to have normal indentation.%
+       \footnote{Like this.}
+  \itemitem{(d)} The style of the references was changed considerably.
+
+\item The ability to produce roman-numeral page numbers using the
+  plain \TeX{} convention (negative \cs{pageno}) was added.
+\item In the preprint style, mathematics-oriented hyphenation exceptions
+  were added.  (These follow American, not British, rules.)
+\item An option was added in the preprint style that
+  allows documents to be formatted
+  as chapters of a monograph rather than as separate papers.
+\item Finally, some optional formatting features requested by
+  \AmSTeX{} users were added to the preprint style.
+\endroster
+
+\medskip
+In version 2.1, the following changes were made:
+\roster
+\item \cs{curraddr}, \cs{rom}, and \cs{linespacing} were added.
+\item Additional error conditions were identified and supplied with more
+  informative messages.
+\item A sporadic line-breaking problem in the preprint style references
+  section was remedied.
+\item Some bugs introduced into the preprint style during the
+ version 2.0 changes were found and eliminated.
+\item Use of the Euler fonts other than medium Euler Fraktur was
+  made more convenient.
+\item The ability to use multiple \cs{thanks} commands was added.
+\item The \cs{proclaim} font was changed from slanted to italic, and
+  \cs{proclaimfont} provided so that users can change it if desired.
+\item \cs{nologo} was reinstated.
+\item The installation instructions were revised and augmented.
+\item The backward compatibility file \filnam{amsppt1.tex} was added.
+\endroster
+
+\medskip
+These changes were made in the January 1997 release:
+\roster
+\item Bugs reported since the release of version 2.1 were fixed.
+\item \cs{urladdr} was added; \cs{linespacing} was documented.
+\item Bibliographic elements were added for {\it Math.\ Reviews},
+  {\it CMP\/} and AMS preprint server references.
+\item Various changes were made to permit easier customization:
+
+  \itemitem{(a)} Command names were given to fonts and dimensions used
+    in various environments.
+  \itemitem{(b)} Changeable end-of-document processing was split out
+    and associated with a new command name.
+  \itemitem{(c)} The output routine was simplified.
+  \itemitem{(d)} Initialization options that a user might want to
+    suppress to save space were moved into a separate file,
+    \filnam{amsppt.sti}
+
+\item Page dimensions were changed in the preprint style to match the
+  current AMS publication specifications.
+\item The mechanism for loading AMSFonts was changed to make it easier
+  for a user to specify the use of a PostScript outline version.
+\item The installation instructions were updated and augmented.
+\endroster
+
+These changes were made in version 2.2:
+\roster
+\item Bugs reported since the release of version 2.1 were fixed.
+\item The requirement to acknowledge use of \AmSTeX{} was removed, and
+  the copyright statement and restriction notice is no longer printed
+  out on the terminal every time \AmSTeX{} starts up.
+\item The installation instructions were completely revised, and based
+  on the \TeX{} Directory Structure (TDS) used by most current \TeX{}
+  distributions.
+\item a \cs{subjclassyear} command was provided to allow a particular
+  version of the Mathematics Subject Classification to be cited.
+\endroster
+
+\subhead This User's Guide\endsubhead
+
+This User's Guide has been prepared using \AmSTeX{} Version~2.2 with the
+preprint style.  Some changes have been made: font and dimension settings
+have been reset, the macros for headings have been redefined to produce a
+result more suited to documentation, and some {\it ad hoc\/} macros have
+been defined to simplify the presentation of particular information.
+However, in general, this document and the file from which it was produced
+illustrate the general appearance and input for a preprint with running
+heads.  Printing the output of \TeX{} for this Guide requires AMSFonts
+Version~2.0 or later
+(users of AMSFonts Version~2.0 are strongly encouraged to upgrade to
+Version~2.2).
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\head 2. Formatting Features
+\endhead
+
+Formatting documents prepared with \AmSTeX{} is accomplished by a
+``style file''.  The features described here are part of the preprint
+style.  The \AmSTeX{} preprint style, Version~2.2, will format an input
+file in a manner suitable for a paper in a journal, unless  the style of
+a \cs{Monograph} is explicitly selected.  Unless noted otherwise,
+the journal style is the style described below.
+
+\setbox1=\hbox{\tt\\dedicatory...\\enddedicatory\ }
+\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\wd1\parindent=0pt\tt\obeylines
+  \strut\\title...\\endtitle
+  \\author...\\endauthor
+  \\affil...\\endaffil
+  \\address...\\endaddress
+  \\curraddr...\\endcurraddr
+  \\email...\\endemail
+  \\urladdr...\\endurladdr
+  \\thanks...\\endthanks
+  \\dedicatory...\\enddedicatory
+  \\date...\\enddate
+  \\translator...\\endtranslator
+  \\keywords...\\endkeywords
+  \\subjclass...\\endsubjclass
+  \strut\\abstract...\\endabstract\endgraf}
+\setbox1=\hbox{$\dsize\left\lbrace\,\vcenter{\vphantom{\copy0}}\right.
+   \nulldelimiterspace=0pt$}%
+\setbox2=\hbox{\kern-\wd1$\dsize\left\lbrace\,\vcenter{\copy0}\right\rbrace$}
+
+\subhead Top Matter\endsubhead
+
+Some commands affect the appearance of a whole document.  Such commands
+should go at the top of your input file, right after the \cs{documentstyle}
+line and before the \cs{topmatter} line.  This area will be referred to as
+the ``preamble''.  Commands that should be in the preamble include
+\cs{define}, \cs{TagsOnRight} and the like,
+\cs{NoPageNumbers}, \cs{NoRunningHeads}, \cs{Monograph},
+\cs{pagewidth}, \cs{pageheight}, \cs{pageno},
+and commands that load fonts.
+The preamble is relevant to any document, whether paper or monograph.
+
+The beginning of an \AmSTeX{} file should look something like what
+is shown in Figure 1.
+
+\topinsert
+
+\beginexample{}
+\\input amstex
+\\documentstyle\{...\}
+\medskip
+\<preamble commands, such as \cs{define}, \cs{pageno}, \cs{Monograph},
+\leavevmode\hbox to20pt{}\cs{NoRunningHeads}, \cs{loadbold}, etc.>
+\medskip
+\\topmatter
+\indent\box2
+\strut\\endtopmatter
+\\document
+\endexample
+
+\botcaption {Figure 1} The beginning of an \AmSTeX{} file
+\endcaption
+\endinsert
+
+If any \cs{end...}\ tag is omitted (or misspelled), an error message will
+appear at \cs{endtopmatter} or at the next blank line: for example, if
+you misspell \cs{endtitle}, the message will be something like
+``{\tt !~Paragraph ended before \cs{title} was
+com\discretionary{-}{}{}plete}.'' If you omit \cs{endtopmatter}, there
+won't be any error message, but none of the topmatter material will
+print. %{\tolerance2000\par}
+Tags should be omitted for any top matter elements for which there is
+no data; if ``empty'' tags are included, empty footnotes may appear on
+the first page, or labels indicating addresses at the end of a paper.
+
+If you have documents that were prepared for versions of \AmSTeX{}
+earlier than version 2.0, you may find the file \filnam{amsppt1.tex}
+useful.  By including the line \cs{input amsppt1} immediately after the
+\cs{documentstyle} line, the topmatter commands and the sectioning
+commands that changed in form will work in the original way. Other than
+that, there should be few incompatibility problems with previous
+versions. Note: The use of \filnam{amsppt1.tex} is discouraged except
+for processing preexisting files.
+
+For multi-line titles, affiliations, authors, or dedications (basically
+everywhere that lines are centered individually rather than being set in
+paragraphs), line breaks are obtained by using \cs{\\}.  In other parts
+of the topmatter, which are set in paragraph form, line breaks are
+obtained by \cs{linebreak}.
+
+The title will be set in uppercase.  To turn off the automatic
+uppercasing, use the \cs{nofrills} option:
+\cs{title\\nofrills...\\endtitle}.
+
+Each author is tagged separately, followed by address(es) and other
+information associated with that author.
+
+Normally, the address given with \cs{address} is the address of the
+author at the time the research was being done; if the author's
+address at the time of publication is different, the current address
+should be given with \cs{curraddr}.  This should be entered immediately
+following the \cs{address} for the same author.  If a \cs{curraddr} is
+not paired with an \cs{address}, the current address will not print.
+
+Electronic mail addresses can be tagged \cs{email...\\endemail}.
+Like \cs{curraddr}, every \cs{email} address must be paired with a regular
+\cs{address}, otherwise the e-mail address will not print.
+The \cs{email} address will be printed at the end of the paper, as
+``{\it E-mail address:\/} \<net-address>'', following the address (and
+current address, if present) with which it is paired.
+
+URLs, the addresses of ``home pages'' on the World Wide Web, can be
+included using \cs{urladdr...\\endurladdr}.  They behave in the same
+manner as \cs{email} addresses.
+
+The \cs{thanks} command is provided for acknowledgments of grant support
+and other kinds of support for the author's research, or other general
+information not covered by one of the predefined tags such as
+\cs{keywords} or \cs{subjclass}. The information will be printed as an
+unnumbered footnote at the bottom of the first page.  Like \cs{address},
+\cs{thanks} can be used more than once, and is associated with a
+particular author.
+
+In case a paper has not only an author but a translator, \cs{translator}
+is provided.  This information will be printed at the end of the paper in
+eight-point roman, as ``Translated by'' followed by the translator's name
+in uppercase.
+
+The \cs{dedicatory} command is used for such things as
+``Dedicated to Professor X on the occasion of his eightieth birthday.''
+The dedication will appear in italics, before the abstract.
+
+The information for \cs{keywords} and \cs{subjclass} appears as
+unnumbered footnotes at the foot of the first page, as in AMS journals.
+In a monograph chapter they will not print at all, since they should be
+handled separately, as part of the front matter for the monograph.
+By default, for backward compatibility, the 1991 Mathematics Subject
+Classification will be cited; to specify the 2000 Mathematics Subject
+Classification, enter
+\beginexample{}
+\\subjclassyear\{2000\}
+\\subjclass ...\\endsubjclass
+\endexample
+
+The abstract heading ``{\eightpoint\smc Abstract.}''\ appears in caps
+and small caps, in the same size (eight point) as the abstract itself.
+
+A simple table of contents setup is available.  Tables of contents
+are typed in the topmatter along with everything else (except for
+monographs---see the section {\bf Book Formatting} below), using
+\cs{toc...\\endtoc}.
+\beginexample{}
+\\toc
+\\specialhead...\\endspecialhead
+\\head...\\endhead
+\\subhead...\\endsubhead
+\\subsubhead...\\endsubsubhead
+\\endtoc
+\endexample
+\noindent
+The syntax of the parts is identical to the syntax used
+for headings within the document (see the sections {\bf Headings} and
+{\bf Book Formatting} below), so that for those who wish to do so
+and have a capable text editor, the table of contents can be constructed
+by extracting the relevant lines from the main text.\footnote{But note that
+the original line breaks in multi-line headings would not be appropriate
+for the table of contents, so you'd want to remove any \cs{\\}es that
+might be present.}
+
+Page numbers aren't usually appropriate for the short table of contents
+that might appear in a journal article, but if desired, page numbers can
+be entered in a manner similar to that for a monograph; see the section
+{\bf Book Formatting} below.
+
+The hanging indentation within a table of contents for \cs{head} and
+\cs{subhead} is preset to accommodate numbers of the form
+``1.''\ and ``1.1.''\ respectively; the amount of indentation can
+be adjusted by using \cs{widestnumber}:
+\beginexample{}
+\\toc
+\\widestnumber\\head\{10\}
+\\widestnumber\\subhead\{10.1\}
+...
+\endexample
+\noindent This can be done more than once within different sections of
+the table of contents, if desired.
+
+If the ``section number'' of a \cs{head} happens to be something like
+``Appendix'' (as actually happens in this User's Guide), a pair
+of empty braces should be entered before it, as follows:
+\beginexample{}
+\\head \{\}\ Appendix. Sample bibliography input ...\\endhead
+\endexample
+\noindent
+Insertion of {\tt\{\}} followed by a space at the beginning of the heading
+text will cause the entire entry to be set flush left as a unit.
+
+If you are preparing a monograph, the format and content of the top matter
+will be different.  See the section below on {\bf Book Formatting} for
+details.
+
+
+\subhead Headings \endsubhead
+
+There are four levels of headings (not counting
+\cs{title}):
+\beginexample{}
+\\specialhead...\\endspecialhead
+\\head...\\endhead
+\\subhead...\\endsubhead
+\\subsubhead...\\endsubsubhead
+\endexample
+\noindent The heading of
+this section was typed as
+\beginexample{}
+\\head 2. Formatting Features
+\\endhead
+\endexample
+
+\noindent And the subheading for this subsection was typed as
+\beginexample{}
+\\subhead Headings\\endsubhead
+\endexample
+\noindent
+Ordinarily, subheadings in the preprint style are run into the text, but for
+this User's Guide, the style varies slightly.
+
+\indent\cs{specialhead} is for long articles that need extra divisions at
+a level above the \cs{head} level. In the preprint style
+\cs{specialhead} uses boldface type and is set ragged right; \cs{head}
+is small caps, centered; \cs{subhead} is boldface, flush left,
+run in with the following text; and
+\cs{subsubhead} is italic, indented as for an ordinary paragraph, and run
+into the text.
+
+Explicit line breaks are obtained by a \cs{\\} in a \cs{head} or a
+\cs{specialhead}, but for \cs{subhead} and \cs{subsubhead},
+which are part of their paragraph, just use \cs{linebreak} as
+you would in normal paragraphed text.
+
+If you are preparing a monograph, the styles of headings will be different.
+See the section below on {\bf Book Formatting} for details.
+
+
+\subhead Theorems and Proofs \endsubhead
+
+In addition to the usual proclamations and demonstrations, mathematicians
+may pose other kinds of propositions, which editors may prefer to see
+presented in different styles.  The following have been provided in
+the preprint style.
+\beginexample{}
+\\definition...\\enddefinition
+\\example...\\endexample
+\\remark...\\endremark
+\endexample
+\noindent
+The proof of any proclamation is indicated by \cs{demo...}\cs{enddemo}.
+
+Note that all kinds of proclamations, demonstrations and propositions
+must be ended explicitly; a check for proper endings is included with
+all classes of proclamations and a missing \cs{end...} is reported.
+
+In the preprint style \cs{definition} and \cs{example} have
+the spacing and heading font of \cs{proclaim}, but are in roman.
+\cs{remark} resembles \cs{demo}
+except that extra space added at the end of a proof by \cs{enddemo}
+is not added by \cs{endremark}.
+
+In accordance with the style of the \JAMS, the labels on \cs{proclaim}s
+and similar constructions are now printed in boldface type (\cs{bf})
+and the text in italic (\cs{it}).  (The command \cs{proclaimfont} is
+provided so that a user can change the text of a proclamation to
+slanted type if desired: \cs{redefine\\proclaimfont\{\\sl\}}.)
+
+It is conventional in mathematical publishing to use roman,  upright
+numbers and punctuation even in the midst of
+italic text, to avoid visual conflicts with numbers and punctuation in
+adjacent math formulas.  Since dedicated ``mathematical text italic''
+fonts containing roman numbers and punctuation are not currently
+available, the \filnam{amsppt} preprint style provides a command
+\cs{rom} to be applied  inside theorems and other stretches of
+italic text, to give the desired results.
+For example, to~produce
+
+\proclaim{Proposition 2.5} Let $S_1,\dots,S_m$ be the components
+of a $J$-holomorphic cusp-curve $S$ and suppose that each
+component $S_i$ is \rom(a multiple covering of\rom) a regular
+curve and that Assumption \rom{(1.4a)} is satisfied. \dots
+\endproclaim
+
+\noindent you would use \cs{rom} in the following places:
+\beginexample{}
+each component \$S\char`\_i\$ is \\rom(a multiple covering of\\rom) a
+regular curve and that Assumption \\rom\{(1.4a)\} is satisfied
+\endexample
+
+As you can see, \cs{rom} is used like the math font command \cs{roman}:
+it applies to the next single character or the next group enclosed in
+braces.
+
+\subhead Other Devices \endsubhead
+
+For a list produced by \cs{roster}, the amount of indentation can be
+adjusted to accommodate wide item numbers.  Just before beginning the
+\cs{roster}, type, for example, \cs{widestnumber\\item\{(viii)\}}.
+This adjustment is temporary.  The default will be reinstated by
+\cs{endroster}.
+
+The command \cs{cite} produces
+a reference citation in roman type, within square brackets: \cite{21}.
+
+A structure \cs{block...}\cs{endblock} is provided for quotations.
+It is intended for use in the middle of a paragraph to quote an
+extract from another source.
+
+
+\subhead Book Formatting \endsubhead
+
+If you are preparing a monograph, several features are available in the
+preprint style that will make your output look like chapters rather than
+individual papers.
+
+First of all, you must signal your intentions by typing \cs{Monograph}
+in the preamble, right after the \cs{documentstyle} line.
+
+A typical topmatter section for a monograph chapter would be typed
+like this:
+\beginexample{}
+\\documentstyle\{amsppt\}
+\\Monograph
+\\topmatter
+\\title\\chapter\{4\} Matrix Algebras\\endtitle
+\\endtopmatter
+\endexample
+\noindent which produces a chapter heading that looks like this:
+\bigskip
+\vbox{
+\centerline{\eightpoint CHAPTER IV}
+\bigskip
+\centerline{\bf MATRIX ALGEBRAS}}
+\bigskip
+\noindent
+Notice that the number is converted automatically to roman numerals and
+the word ``{\eightpoint CHAPTER}'' is added.  For a chapter title that
+needs a different sort of treatment, \cs{nofrills} can be used:
+
+\beginexample{}
+\\topmatter
+\\title\\chapter\\nofrills\{APPENDIX D\} The Poisson Integral\\endtitle
+\\endtopmatter
+\endexample
+\noindent This produces
+\bigskip
+\vbox{
+\centerline{\eightpoint APPENDIX D}
+\bigskip
+\centerline{\bf THE POISSON INTEGRAL}}
+\bigskip
+\noindent The replacement \cs{chapter} text will appear exactly as
+typed.
+
+Finally, for things like a preface or introduction which have no
+pretitle text at all, omit the \cs{chapter} command:
+\beginexample{}
+\\topmatter
+\\title Preface\\endtitle
+\\endtopmatter
+\endexample
+
+In monographs, the table of contents is usually treated as a separate
+chapter.  Start by typing the title ``Contents'' as for a preface or
+introduction, and then use the \cs{toc...\\endtoc} structure as the
+body of the document (rather than putting it in the topmatter, as you
+would for a journal article).
+\beginexample{}
+\\topmatter
+\\title Contents\\endtitle
+\\endtopmatter
+\bigskip
+\\document
+\\toc
+\\title Preface\\page\{vii\}\\endtitle
+\\title\\chapter\{1\} Matrix Algebras\\page\{1\}\\endtitle
+\\head \{\} Continuous complex-valued functions\\page\{1\}\\endhead
+...
+\\title Bibliography\\page\{307\}\\endtitle
+\\endtoc
+\\enddocument
+\endexample
+
+The chapter titles listed in the table of contents are typed in the same
+way as in actual use.  To get page numbers in the table of contents, use
+\cs{page} as shown, just before the ending of an element.  This option
+is available for all levels of headings.
+
+In a monograph using the preprint style, the chapter title is used for
+the left running head and the text of section headings
+(from \cs{head}) appears as the right running head.
+It's not uncommon for the text of a heading to be too long to fit
+in the running head width; in such a case use \cs{rightheadtext} to
+specify a shortened form of the heading for use in the running heads:
+\beginexample{}
+\\head Fourier coefficients of continuous periodic functions
+of bounded entropy norm\\endhead
+\\rightheadtext\{Fourier coefficients of periodic functions\}
+\endexample
+\noindent This should follow immediately after the \cs{head}, to ensure
+that both take effect on the same page.  If the chapter title is too long
+to fit as a running head, a shortened form can be supplied in a similar
+way with \cs{leftheadtext} immediately after the \cs{title}.
+See also the section~{\bf Running Heads}.
+
+The style for a chapter of a monograph differs in some particulars from the
+style for a paper.  The text of a \cs{head} will be boldface instead of
+small caps; headings of theorems, propositions, definitions, remarks, etc\.
+will be small caps instead of boldface, and indented rather than flush
+left.
+
+
+\subhead Inserts with Captions \endsubhead
+
+Figures, tables, and some other kinds of objects are often handled as
+inserts.  These objects may be prepared separately from the main document
+and pasted in, in which case space must be left for them.
+These objects usually have captions; a caption may be positioned above (for
+a table) or below (for a figure).
+
+An insert may be specified for the top or ``middle'' of a page, i.e.,
+right where the input for the insert occurs in the text.  These are
+typed as \cs{topinsert} and \cs{midinsert} respectively.
+Furthermore, a caption may be placed at the top or the bottom of the insert,
+using the tags \cs{topcaption} and \cs{botcaption} respectively.
+
+The general structure used to specify an insert with a caption at the top is:
+\beginexample{}
+\\topinsert\quad{\rm or}\quad \\midinsert
+\cs{captionwidth}\{\Dimen\}\quad{\rm(optional)}
+\\topcaption\{\<caption label>\}
+\ \<optional caption text>
+\\endcaption
+\cs{vspace}\{\Dimen\}\quad{\rm or}\quad%
+  \<optional code for the insertion body>
+\\endinsert
+\endexample
+
+Here the notation \Dimen{} means a valid \TeX{} dimension as
+described in the {\bf Dimensions} section of \JoT{}.
+If a bottom caption was desired, \cs{topcaption} would be replaced by
+\cs{botcaption}, and
+the \cs{vspace} command (or the
+optional code for the insertion body) would be moved before the
+\cs{botcaption} macro.
+
+The \cs{vspace\{\Dimen\}} option would be used to leave blank space for
+an object to be pasted into place.  The value of the \Dimen{} should be
+the exact height of the object to be pasted in, because extra space
+around the object and the caption are dependent on the document style,
+and will be provided automatically.
+
+The \cs{captionwidth\{\Dimen\}} option may be used to override the default
+caption width specified by the document style.
+
+The \<caption label> is something like ``Figure~1'' or ``Table~2a''.
+Do not type any final punctuation; it will be provided.  The caption
+label will be set in caps and small caps.
+
+The \<optional caption text> is any descriptive text that may be desired.
+The preprint style will set this in roman.  Even if there is no text, the
+\cs{endcaption} tag must be present.
+
+If you choose to include the \TeX{} code for a figure, table, or other
+captioned object in the input, then omit the \cs{vspace} command
+and type the code where appropriate (before \cs{botcaption}
+or after the \cs{endcaption} of \cs{topcaption}).
+
+Sometimes a table is small enough that it is not necessary to put it in an
+insert.  If the caption is to appear above it, input can be typed as follows:
+\beginexample{}
+\\topcaption\{\<caption label>\}
+\ \<optional caption text>
+\\endcaption
+\ \<code for the table body>
+\endexample
+\noindent
+The form of the input would be the following if the caption is to appear below:
+\beginexample{}
+\ \<code for the table body>
+\\botcaption\{\<caption label>\}
+\ \<optional caption text>
+\\endcaption
+\endexample
+\noindent
+To avoid page-breaking problems,
+this form of ``insertion'' should be used only for very small objects.
+
+
+\subhead Page Numbers \endsubhead
+
+If you are using the preprint style, page numbers will appear in the running
+heads, at the outside margin, except for the first page, where the running head
+will be omitted and the page number will be centered at the bottom of the page.
+
+If you wish to omit page numbers, type \cs{NoPageNumbers} in the preamble
+of the document (after the \cs{documentstyle} line).
+The running head text will remain; see also {\bf Running Heads}.
+
+You can get roman numeral page numbers, e.g.\ for a table of contents or
+preface, using the normal \TeX{} convention of \cs{pageno} plus
+a negative number.
+
+
+\subhead Page Size and Line Spacing \endsubhead
+
+In the preprint style, the default page width is 30pc, and the default
+height is 50.5pc.
+You can change the size of the page by typing
+\beginexample{}
+\\pagewidth\{\Dimen\}\newline
+\\pageheight\{\Dimen\}
+\endexample
+\noindent using suitable \Dimen{}s, where by this notation we mean a
+valid \TeX{} dimension as described in the {\bf Dimensions} section of
+\JoT{}.
+
+The spacing between lines in the preprint style is ordinarily 2pt greater
+than the nominal type size.  This can be changed by providing a multiplication
+factor to the command \cs{linespacing}; for example, \cs{linespacing\{1.5\}}
+gives the effect of typewritten doublespacing.
+
+
+\subhead QED \endsubhead
+
+In the preprint style, \cs{qed} gives an open box `$\square$',
+separated from what precedes it by a quad of space.
+
+
+\subhead Running Heads \endsubhead
+
+If you are using the preprint style, running heads similar to those in
+\Joy{} will appear, with text in the center and page numbers to the
+outside.  (On the first page, as usual, the running head is omitted, and
+the page number is placed at the bottom.)
+
+If you do nothing to define the text of the running heads, the author's
+name will be used on the left-hand and the title on the right-hand pages.
+(This is the style for papers; for monographs, see below.)
+If you want some other values, say a shortened title, you
+can redefine the text to appear on left- and right-hand pages by typing
+\beginexample{}
+\\leftheadtext\{\<left running head text>\}
+\\rightheadtext\{\<right running head text>\}
+\endexample
+
+\noindent These instructions can appear anywhere after the
+\cs{documentstyle} command, but the most
+common place to use them is immediately after a \cs{title} or
+\cs{author} or \cs{head} to override the automatic running head text.
+If \cs{rightheadtext} or \cs{leftheadtext} is specified above the
+topmatter, \cs{title} and \cs{author} will not override them.
+
+If you are doing a monograph rather than a journal article, and use
+the \cs{Monograph} switch, it affects the running heads as follows:
+The chapter title appears in the left-hand running heads, and the text of
+the current section heading (from \cs{head}) appears in the right-hand
+running heads.  In chapters that don't contain any \cs{head}s---for
+example, a foreword---both the left- and right-hand running heads
+will contain the chapter title.
+
+By default, running heads will be uppercase.  This is a frill that
+can be turned off by \cs{nofrills}, e.g.,
+\beginexample{}
+\\rightheadtext\\nofrills\{Text of Running Head\}
+\endexample
+
+If for some reason you don't want running heads at all, type
+\cs{NoRunningHeads} in the preamble of the document (after the
+\cs{documentstyle} line).  When running heads are omitted, page numbers
+will appear centered at the bottom of the page.  (And even those can be
+turned off using \cs{NoPageNumbers}.)
+
+In a monograph, if you don't want
+the text from the section \cs{head}s to appear in the running heads
+you must redefine the internal command, \cs{headmark}, that is used
+by \cs{head} to set the right-hand running head. To do this, put the
+following line in your document file, after \cs{Monograph} and
+before \cs{topmatter}:
+\beginexample{}
+\\redefine\\headmark\#1\{\}
+\endexample
+\noindent (where the {\tt\#1} is an argument number as explained in \Joy,
+in the description of \cs{define} and related commands).
+
+\subhead Tables \endsubhead
+
+There are no special macros to support the creation of tables in
+\AmSTeX{}. Plain \TeX{}'s \cs{settabs}
+command and \cs{halign} can also be used (see {\it The \TeX{}book} for
+documentation of their usage). More sophisticated table macro packages
+are available from other sources. See also the section {\bf Inserts with
+Captions} above.
+
+\subhead Bibliographies \endsubhead
+
+The references section of a paper begins with \cs{Refs} and must have
+\cs{endRefs} at the end.  Each entry in the references begins with
+\cs{ref} and ends with \cs{endref}.  The individual elements between
+\cs{ref} and \cs{endref} can be specified in any order. However,
+following \cs{ref} is usually a number or other label identifying the
+particular reference. This label is produced using \cs{key}.
+The format of the labels is determined by the current
+{\it references style}, which is set by the \cs{refstyle}
+command. The preprint document style provides three reference
+styles denoted A, B, and C, corresponding to
+letter labels, no labels, and arabic numbers respectively.
+The form of the \cs{cite} and \cs{key} commands for each
+style, and the output they produce, is as follows:
+$$
+\vbox{\offinterlineskip\def\strut{\vrule depth.35\normalbaselineskip
+  width0pt height.75\normalbaselineskip}\tabskip0pt
+  \halign{{\tt\strut#}\hfil&\quad#\hfil&\quad\vrule\quad{\tt#}\hfil&
+       \quad#\hfil&\quad\vrule\quad{\tt#}\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr
+\multispan2\strut depth.7\normalbaselineskip\cs{refstyle\{A\}}&
+       \multispan2\quad\vrule\quad\cs{refstyle\{B\}}&
+       \multispan2\quad\vrule\quad\cs{refstyle\{C\}}\cr
+%
+\noalign{\hrule}
+%
+ height1.1\normalbaselineskip\cs{cite\{DK\}}& [DK]&
+       \cs{cite\{Smith 1989\}}& [Smith 1989]&
+       \cs{cite\{19\}}& [19]\cr
+%
+\cs{key DK}& [DK]&
+       \omit\quad\vrule\quad(no key)\hfil & (no label)&
+       \cs{key 19}& 19.\cr
+}}$$
+The \cs{refstyle} command is normally placed in the preamble of
+a document.
+
+The references are set with hanging indentation.  The amount of indentation
+is preset to accommodate the most common case, two-digit numbers.
+It can be increased (or decreased) by specifying the widest
+label used in the references. For example,
+\beginexample{}
+\\widestnumber\\key\{GHMR\} \% refstyle A
+\\widestnumber\\key\{999\} \% refstyle C --- 3 digits
+\endexample
+\noindent
+will increase the indentation to accommodate the key \hbox{[GHMR]}, or a
+three-digit number, respectively.   You could also specify
+\cs{widestnumber}\cs{key\{9\}} to reduce the indentation from two digits'
+worth to one, if your bibliography has fewer than ten entries. As the
+examples show, you do not include square brackets, periods, font
+commands, or other such formatting when using \cs{widestnumber}.  The
+indentation will be adjusted for these things automatically.
+
+For consecutive references by the same author(s),  \cs{by} is used for
+the first reference, with the author name(s) given in full, and
+\cs{bysame} is used for subsequent ones---just the command \cs{bysame}
+without repetition of the name(s). The horizontal line produced by
+\cs{bysame} has a fixed length of three ems.
+
+Two variations, \cs{ed} and \cs{eds}, are provided for entering editor
+names, as with \cs{page} and \cs{pages}, because the note ``ed.''\ or
+``eds.''\ is part of the automatic formatting.  If \cs{by} is absent,
+the editor name(s) will be used in place of the author name.
+
+For a proceedings volume, the place and date of the meeting can
+be recorded in the \cs{procinfo} field.  Parentheses will be
+added.
+
+There are two options for miscellaneous notes at the end of a reference,
+\cs{finalinfo} and \cs{miscnote}.  \cs{miscnote} differs only by
+automatically adding parentheses; it would typically be used for
+a note such as ``(preprint)'' or ``(submitted)'' or ``(to appear)''.
+Because it's fairly common, the latter has its own command \cs{toappear}
+that is equivalent to \cs{miscnote} {\tt to appear}.
+
+\cs{lang} is used to indicate the original language for papers where
+bibliographic information has been translated or there is some other reason
+to believe that the original language cannot be correctly identified from
+information in the reference.
+
+Sometimes several references are combined into one---for example, parts
+of a long paper that have been published separately.  Another type of
+compound reference is a work cited both in the original and in
+translation.  There are commands \cs{moreref} and \cs{transl} to handle
+such situations.  After \cs{moreref} and \cs{transl}, any of the normal
+reference tags can be used again.
+
+\cs{moreref} is used for citing, e.g., ``part II'' of an article; the
+\cs{moreref} command is followed by the desired additional tags and
+data.  For example:
+\beginexample{}
+...\\moreref\\paper\\rom\{II\}
+\\jour Comm. Pure Appl. Math. \\vol 36
+\\yr 1983 \\pages 571--594\\endref
+\endexample
+
+When using \cs{transl}, a note  that describes the translation is
+normally entered between \cs{transl} and the next tag. The tags and data
+for the translated work then follow. For example:
+\beginexample{}
+...\\transl English transl. \\publ Birkh\\"auser
+\\publaddr Basel \\yr 1985 \\endref
+\endexample
+
+Automatic punctuation will be omitted if the pertinent field was
+included but left blank.  Otherwise, the command \cs{nofrills} can be
+used to keep automatic punctuation from appearing.  For example,
+\cs{bookinfo\\nofrills...}\ suppresses the comma or other punctuation
+that would normally be added at the end of the \cs{bookinfo}
+information. \cs{nofrills} also suppresses other automatic formatting
+such as the word ``eds.''\ for \cs{eds}, the word ``vol.''\ for book volumes,
+or the parentheses around the year for journal articles. The ending
+period of a reference can be suppressed with
+\cs{finalinfo}\cs{nofrills}.
+
+Some examples will illustrate the use of these tags.  See Appendix~A for
+samples of input and output. See also Appendix~C of \JoT{} (first
+edition: Appendix~B) for more information on references.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\head 3. Mathematical Constructions
+\endhead
+
+\subhead Wide Accents in Math Mode \endsubhead
+
+In version 2.0+ of the AMSFonts,
+there are wider versions of the \cs{widehat} and \cs{widetilde}
+accents; they appear on lines (5) and (6):
+\beginexample{}
+\exbox{(1)}{\$\\hat x, \\tilde x\$} $\hat x, \tilde x$
+\exbox{(2)}{\$\\widehat x, \\widetilde x\$} $\widehat x, \widetilde x$
+\exbox{(3)}{\$\\widehat\{xy\}, \\widetilde\{xy\}\$} %
+  $\widehat{xy}, \widetilde{xy}$
+\exbox{(4)}{\$\\widehat\{xyz\}, \\widetilde\{xyz\}\$} %
+  $\widehat{xyz}, \widetilde{xyz}$
+\exbox{(5)}{\$\\widehat\{xyzu\}, \\widetilde\{xyzu\}\$} %
+  $\widehat{xyzu}, \widetilde{xyzu}$
+\exbox{(6)}{\$\\widehat\{xyzuv\}, \\widetilde\{xyzuv\}\$} %
+  $\widehat{xyzuv}, \widetilde{xyzuv}$
+\endexample
+\noindent
+These wider accents are in the \filnam{msbm} family.  If \filnam{msbm}
+has been loaded, \cs{widehat} and \cs{widetilde} will automatically
+select these wider versions when required; otherwise, the characters
+on line (4) will be the largest available.  If you are using the
+preprint style, \filnam{msbm} is loaded automatically; otherwise,
+see the section entitled {\bf Fonts} for instructions on loading it.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\head 4. Fonts\endhead
+
+\subhead Additional fonts for \AmSTeX{}\endsubhead
+
+A number of fonts were created for use with \AmSTeX{} 2.0+, both
+Computer Modern fonts in sizes not previously available and new fonts
+of alphabets and symbols intended to be used for mathematical notation.
+These fonts are in the collection AMSFonts Version~2.2.  They must be
+installed on your computer before you can use \AmSTeX{}'s preprint style
+or otherwise refer to them.
+Note that AMSFonts Version~2.2 cannot be used with versions of \AmSTeX{}
+earlier than Version~2.0, and \AmSTeX{} Version~2.2 cannot be used with
+versions of AMSFonts earlier than Version~2.0
+(users of AMSFonts Version~2.0 are strongly encouraged to upgrade to
+Version~2.2).
+
+Several of these fonts are loaded automatically by the preprint
+style and others can be loaded on demand.  The fonts available and the
+commands used to load them are described below.
+
+\subsubhead Fonts loaded with the preprint style
+\endsubsubhead
+Several fonts are loaded automatically for general use.
+\roster
+\item"--" \filnam{cmcsc8} is an additional size of the Computer Modern
+        small caps font.
+\item"--" \filnam{cmex8} and \filnam{cmex7} are additional sizes of the
+        Computer Modern math extension font.  \filnam{cmex8} is used by the
+        preprint style in abstracts and other eight-point environments;
+        \filnam{cmex7} is used for all sub- and superscripts.
+\endroster
+If \cs{PSAMSFonts} is specified (see Appendix C), scaled versions of the
+10-point fonts are loaded instead (this is required for submission to
+AMS journals).
+
+
+\subsubhead Math fonts loaded with the preprint style
+\endsubsubhead
+\roster
+\item"--" \filnam{msam} and \filnam{msbm} contain extra symbols.  The symbols
+        and the names that will produce them are shown in the section
+        {\bf Symbol Names} below.  If you are not using the preprint style,
+        each can be loaded separately by \cs{loadmsam} or \cs{loadmsbm}
+        as appropriate.
+\item"--" \filnam{eufm} is the medium-weight Euler Fraktur (German) font.
+        It can also be loaded by \cs{loadeufm} if the preprint style is not
+        being used.
+\endroster
+
+
+\subsubhead Math fonts loaded by \cs{loadbold}
+\endsubsubhead
+See the sections below on {\bf Bold Characters in Math Mode} and
+{\bf Bold Greek Letters} for details on accessing particular characters
+in these fonts.
+\roster
+\item"--" \filnam{cmmib} is Computer Modern bold math italic.
+        It also contains bold Greek.
+\item"--" \filnam{cmbsy} contains Computer Modern bold math symbols.
+\endroster
+
+
+\subsubhead Additional Euler fonts, for use in math, loaded by
+\cs{loadeu...}\tt\endsubsubhead
+\roster
+\item"--" \filnam{eufb} is bold Fraktur (\cs{loadeufb}).
+\item"--" \filnam{eusm} is medium-weight script (\cs{loadeusm}).
+\item"--" \filnam{eusb} is bold script (\cs{loadeusb}).
+\item"--" \filnam{eurm} is medium-weight ``cursive roman'' (\cs{loadeurm}).
+\item"--" \filnam{eurb} is bold ``cursive roman'' (\cs{loadeurb}).
+\endroster
+
+
+\subsubhead Considerations and warnings\endsubsubhead
+The commands to load these font files should be typed in the preamble area
+between the
+\cs{documentstyle\{...\}} line and the \cs{topmatter}.
+Each \cs{load...} command loads the pertinent fonts (including
+subscript sizes), assigns a ``math
+family'' for them, and defines a math font command.
+The names of the commands are the same as the font names:
+\cs{eufm}, \cs{eufb}, \cs{eusm}, \cs{eusb}, \cs{eurm}, and
+\cs{eurb}.  These are used in the same way as
+\cs{roman} or \cs{bold}, e.g., \cs{eufb\{M\}} or \cs{eufb M}@.
+\AmSTeX{} also defines a couple of synonyms,
+\cs{frak} and \cs{goth}, for \cs{eufm} (medium Euler Fraktur).
+
+\TeX{} can accommodate only sixteen font families in math mode; eight
+are already defined by plain \TeX{} before \AmSTeX{} begins, and the
+preprint style loads three more (\filnam{msam}, \filnam{msbm}, and
+\filnam{eufm}), for a total of eleven.  For this reason, you should load
+additional fonts with care, requesting only those you know for certain
+you will need.
+
+All the fonts described here, and some others as well, are included in the
+collection AMSFonts Version~2.2, which is available from the AMS and other
+distributors.  The math fonts mentioned here are all supplied in sizes from
+five through ten point, suitable for use in mathematical text.
+
+If you intend to use the AMSFonts in PostScript Type~1 outline form,
+see Appendix C.
+
+
+\subhead Bold Characters in Math Mode \endsubhead
+
+Bold letters are obtained by \cs{bold} as described in \Joy{}.
+In addition, bold symbols, italic, and lowercase Greek can be
+obtained once \cs{loadbold} appears in the file (this
+requires version 2.0+ of \AmSTeX{} and AMSFonts).  Two control sequences
+are used for different kinds of bold symbols:
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=1.25in}
+\exbox{}{\\boldkey} for symbols that actually appear on the keyboard
+\exbox{}{\\boldsymbol} for symbols specified by a single control sequence
+\endexample
+\noindent
+For example,
+$$\hbox{\tt\$\\bold x \\boldsymbol\\in \\boldsymbol\\varGamma\$}$$
+gives
+$$\bold x \boldsymbol\in \boldsymbol\varGamma$$
+[and {\tt\$\\boldsymbol\\lbrack a \\boldsymbol\\rbrack\$} gives
+$\boldsymbol\lbrack a \boldsymbol\rbrack$, if you need to use
+\cs{lbrack} and \cs{rbrack} instead of the {\tt[} and {\tt]} keys].
+
+More precisely, \cs{boldkey} can be used in math formulas in the
+following combinations:
+\roster
+\item"$\bullet$" With any of the symbols
+$$ +\ \ -\ \ =\ \ <\ \ >\ \ (\ \ )\ \ [\ \ ]\ \ |\ \ /\ \ *
+    \ \ .\ \ ,\ \ :\ \ ;\ \ !\ \ ?$$
+to give
+$$
+\boldkey+\ \ \boldkey-\ \ \boldkey=\ \ \boldkey<\ \ \boldkey>\ \
+\boldkey(\ \ \boldkey)\ \ \boldkey[\ \ \boldkey]\ \ \boldkey|\ \
+\boldkey/\ \ \boldkey*\ \ \boldkey.\ \ \boldkey,\ \ \boldkey:\ \
+\boldkey;\ \ \boldkey!\ \ \boldkey?
+$$
+But \cs{bold} cannot be used to get bold versions of these symbols.
+{\tt\$\\bold+\$} will give only the ordinary $+$, etc.
+
+The bold $\boldkey+$ and $\boldkey-$ will be  binary operators,
+like the ordinary $+$ and $-$ symbols;
+the bold $\boldkey=$ will be a binary relation, like the ordinary $=$, etc.
+
+\medskip
+\item"$\bullet$" With letters:
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=3.75in}
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldkey a\$, ..., \$\\boldkey z\$} %
+        $\boldkey a, \dots, \boldkey z$
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldkey A\$, ..., \$\\boldkey Z\$} %
+        $\boldkey A, \dots, \boldkey Z$
+\endexample
+\noindent
+Notice that these are $\fam\cmmibfam bold\ math\ italic$ letters, as
+opposed to the bold text letters $\bold a, \dots, \bold z$, $\bold A,
+\dots, \bold Z$ that you get by using \cs{bold} in math mode.
+
+\medskip
+\item"$\bullet$" With numerals:
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=3.75in}
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldkey 0\$, ..., \$\\boldkey 9\$} %
+        $\boldkey 0, \dots, \boldkey 9$
+\endexample
+\noindent
+However, these combinations simply give the same numerals that you get with
+{\tt\$\\bold0\$}, \dots, {\tt\$\\bold9\$}.
+\endroster
+
+\medskip
+The \cs{boldsymbol} construction can be used in any of the following
+combinations:
+\roster
+\item"$\bullet$" With uppercase and lowercase Greek letters
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=3.75in}
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldsymbol\\Gamma\$, ..., \$\\boldsymbol\\Omega\$} %
+        $\boldsymbol\Gamma$, \dots, $\boldsymbol\Omega$
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldsymbol\\varGamma\$, ..., \$\\boldsymbol\\varOmega\$} %
+        $\boldsymbol\varGamma$, \dots, $\boldsymbol\varOmega$
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldsymbol\\alpha\$, ..., \$\\boldsymbol\\omega\$} %
+        $\boldsymbol\alpha$, \dots, $\boldsymbol\omega$
+\endexample
+\noindent
+In versions of \AmSTeX{} earlier than 2.0, bold unslanted uppercase
+Greek letters $\boldsymbol\Gamma$, \dots, $\boldsymbol\Omega$ were
+specified by \cs{boldGamma}, \dots, \cs{boldOmega}; these control
+sequences have now disappeared.
+
+\medskip
+\item"$\bullet$"
+For convenience, \cs{boldsymbol} may also be followed by a letter (but
+not by a numeral or other character), giving the same result as
+\cs{boldkey}.
+
+\medskip
+\item"$\bullet$"
+You can also apply \cs{boldsymbol} to all the other standard symbols that
+are specified by single control sequences. For example, to get bold primes:
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=3.75in}
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldsymbol\\prime\$} $\boldsymbol\prime$
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldsymbol A\^{ }\{\\boldsymbol\\prime\}\$} %
+        $\boldsymbol A^{\boldsymbol\prime}$
+\endexample
+\noindent
+(But \cs{boldsymbol'}, using the shorthand notation for \cs{prime},
+won't work.)
+
+\medskip
+\item"$\bullet$"
+You can apply \cs{boldsymbol} to ``delimiters'', such as
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=3.75in}
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldsymbol\\\{ ... \\boldsymbol\\\}\$} %
+        $\boldsymbol\{ \dots \boldsymbol\}$
+\exbox{}{\$\\boldsymbol\\langle ... \\boldsymbol\\rangle\$} %
+        $\boldsymbol\langle \dots \boldsymbol\rangle$
+\exbox{}{\$\char`\|, \\boldkey\char`\|, \\\char`\|, \\boldsymbol\\\char`\|\$} %
+        $|,\ \boldkey|,\ \|,\ \boldsymbol\|$
+\exbox{}{\$\\vert, \\boldsymbol\\vert, \\Vert, \\boldsymbol\\Vert\$} %
+        $\vert,\ \boldsymbol\vert,\ \Vert,\ \boldsymbol\Vert$
+\endexample
+\noindent
+However, you can't use \cs{boldsymbol} after \cs{left} and \cs{right}.
+In particular, typing
+\hbox{\tt\\left\\boldsymbol\char`\|\ ...\ \\right\\boldsymbol\char`\|}
+will produce only error messages.
+
+\medskip
+\item"$\bullet$"
+Certain symbols on the bold fonts can't be accessed at all via \cs{boldkey}
+or \cs{boldsymbol}: These include bold versions
+${\fam\cmbsyfam A}$, \dots, ${\fam\cmbsyfam Z}$
+ of the ``calligraphic letters'' $\Cal A$,~\dots, $\Cal Z$ that you type
+as \cs{Cal A}, \dots, \cs{Cal Z},
+and bold versions {\tencmmib0}, \dots, {\tencmmib9}
+ of the oldstyle numbers
+\oldnos0, \dots, \oldnos9 that you get with \cs{oldnos}.  If
+you really need to have these symbols, you will have to enlist the aid of a
+\TeX{}nician, or use \cs{pmb}.
+\endroster
+
+
+\subhead Fraktur Font \endsubhead
+
+The German Fraktur font, which is designed for use
+only in math mode, can be made
+available by typing \cs{loadeufm} in the preamble area
+of your paper.  If you are using the preprint style,
+medium-weight Fraktur is loaded automatically.
+To produce a Fraktur letter, type
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=3.75in}
+\exbox{}{\$\\frak g\$} $\frak g$
+\exbox{}{\$\\frak A\$, \\dots, \$\\frak Z\$} $\frak A$, \dots, $\frak Z$
+\endexample
+
+
+\subhead Blackboard Bold \endsubhead
+
+\AmSTeX{} has a ``blackboard bold'' font, \cs{Bbb}.  Like \cs{Cal},
+it will work only in math mode, and only when applied to uppercase
+letters.  This alphabet is part of the \filnam{msbm} font, and can be
+made available by typing \cs{loadmsbm} at the top of your file.  (It is
+loaded automatically with the preprint style.)
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=3.75in}
+\exbox{}{\$\\Bbb A, \\Bbb C, \\Bbb R\$, etc.} $\Bbb A, \Bbb C, \Bbb R$, etc.
+\endexample
+
+
+\subhead Poor Man's Bold \endsubhead
+
+\AmSTeX{} now has boldface versions of most math symbols.  However, if you
+need only one or two bold symbols and have run out of \TeX{} capacity for
+new fonts or font families, you can always get a poor man's bold version
+of bold with \cs{pmb}, as described in \Joy{}.
+
+
+\subhead Bold Greek Letters \endsubhead
+
+Bold Greek letters, both lowercase and uppercase, can be obtained by
+using the \cs{boldsymbol} construction, as described in {\bf Bold
+Characters in Math Mode}.  The upright uppercase bold Greek letters are
+part of the ordinary bold font and therefore extra font loading commands
+do not need to be used in order to get them.  However, the lowercase and
+slanted uppercase bold Greek letters are not loaded automatically, so
+you must specify \cs{loadbold} before using them.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\head 5. Symbol Names
+\endhead
+
+The symbols in the \filnam{msam} and \filnam{msbm} fonts have been
+assigned ``standard'' control sequence names as shown below.  All
+the symbol names are loaded automatically by the preprint style; if
+you are not using the preprint style, the command \cs{UseAMSsymbols}
+will have the same effect.
+This will add about 200 new
+control sequences to \TeX{}'s internal table.  If you are short on
+space, or need only a few of the symbols, you can use a different
+approach to access just the ones you need.  See the section {\bf The
+\cs{newsymbol} command} below.
+
+
+\subhead Special Symbols and Blackboard Bold Letters
+\endsubhead
+
+Certain symbols from the \filnam{msam} family can be specified by
+control sequences that will be defined as soon as the command
+\cs{loadmsam} has appeared in the file.
+
+First there are four symbols that are normally used outside of math mode:
+$$\vcenter{\halign to\hsize{\1{#}\hfil\tabskip\centering&
+   \hbox to.5\hsize{\1{#}\hfil}\tabskip0pt\cr
+checkmark&circledR\cr
+maltese&yen\cr}}
+$$
+These symbols, like \P, \S, \dag, and \ddag, can also be used in
+math mode, and will change sizes correctly in subscripts and superscripts.
+
+Next are four symbols that are ``delimiters'' (although there are
+no larger versions obtainable with \cs{left} and \cs{right}), so they
+must be used in math mode:
+$$\vcenter{\halign to\hsize{\1{#}\hfil\tabskip\centering&
+   \hbox to.5\hsize{\1{#}\hfil}\tabskip0pt\cr
+ ulcorner&urcorner\cr
+ llcorner&lrcorner\cr}}$$
+
+Finally, two dashed arrows are constructed from symbols in this family.
+Note that one of them has two names; it can be accessed by either one:
+$$\vcenter{\halign to\hsize{\1{#}\hfil\tabskip\centering&
+   \hbox to.5\hsize{\1{#}\hfil}\tabskip0pt\cr
+ \omit\hbox to.5\hsize{\hbox to\biggest{\hfil$\dashrightarrow$\hfil}\ \ %
+    \cs{dashrightarrow}, \cs{dasharrow}\hss}&dashleftarrow\cr}}$$
+
+The Blackboard Bold letters $\Bbb A, \dots, \Bbb Z$
+appear in the \filnam{msbm} family.  Once \cs{loadmsbm} has appeared
+in the file, they can be typed (in math mode) as \cs{Bbb A}, \dots,
+\cs{Bbb Z}.
+
+The \filnam{msbm} family also contains wider versions of the \cs{widehat}
+and \cs{widetilde} as shown above in {\bf Mathematical Constructions}.
+
+
+\subhead The \cs{newsymbol} Command\endsubhead
+
+All other symbols of the \filnam{msam} and \filnam{msbm} fonts must be named
+by control sequences so that they can be used (in math mode only) when the
+fonts are loaded.  This can be done all at once by typing the instruction
+\cs{UseAMSsymbols}, which will load in the file \filnam{amssym.tex}\null.
+This instruction is included in the preprint style, so the names are
+assigned automatically, which requires over~200 control sequences.
+
+If you are very short on space for control sequence names, and need only
+a few of these symbols, you can omit \cs{UseAMSsymbols}.  Instead,
+assign only the names you will need by using a new \AmSTeX{} control
+sequence \cs{newsymbol} to create a control sequence that will
+properly produce this symbol.  The control sequence can be either the
+``standard'' name, as listed below, or one of your own choosing.
+
+The list of symbols below shows for each symbol the symbol itself, a
+four-character~``ID'', and the ``standard'' name of the symbol.
+(The first character of the ID identifies the font family in which a
+symbol resides.  Symbols from the \filnam{msam} family have {\tt1} as the
+first character; symbols from the \filnam{msbm} family have {\tt2} as the
+first character.)
+For example, the symbol $\nleqslant$ appears as
+\medskip
+\noindent\kern2\parindent\2{nleqslant}
+\medskip
+\noindent
+To produce a control sequence with this name, the instruction
+\medskip
+\noindent\kern2\parindent\cs{newsymbol}\cs{nleqslant 230A}
+\medskip
+\noindent
+appears in the file \filnam{amssym.tex}\null.  This same instruction can
+be typed by a user who is not using the preprint style and has chosen not
+to load all the symbol names by \cs{UseAMSsymbols}.  Thereafter, the
+control sequence \cs{nleqslant} will produce the symbol $\nleqslant$
+(in math mode), and will act properly as a ``binary relation''.
+
+A few symbols in these fonts replace symbols defined in \filnam{plain.tex}
+by combinations of symbols available in the Computer Modern fonts.  These
+are \cs{angle}~($\angle$) and \cs{hbar}~($\hbar$) from the group
+``Miscellaneous symbols'', and \cs{rightleftharpoons}~($\rightleftharpoons$)
+from the group ``Arrows'' below (and \Joy, Appendix~F).  The new symbols will
+change sizes correctly in subscripts and superscripts, provided that you
+are using appropriate redefinitions.  In order to use \cs{newsymbol} to
+replace an existing definition, the name must first be ``undefined''.
+Here are the lines you must put in your file if you are not using the
+preprint style or \cs{UseAMSsymbols} (which perform the redefinition
+automatically):
+\medskip
+\begingroup
+\parindent=2\parindent
+\obeylines
+\cs{undefine}\cs{angle}
+\cs{newsymbol}\cs{angle 105C}
+\cs{undefine}\cs{hbar}
+\cs{newsymbol}\cs{hbar 207E}
+\cs{undefine}\cs{rightleftharpoons}
+\cs{newsymbol}\cs{rightleftharpoons 130A}
+\endgroup
+\medskip
+\noindent
+These symbols are flagged in the tables below with a ``{\eightpoint(U)}''
+as a reminder that they must be undefined.
+
+Note in the tables that some symbols are shown with two names.  In such
+cases, either one can be used to access the symbol.
+
+%  since the symbol tables are set in displays, decrease the skip
+%  above, so that the space between a section heading and table is
+%  not so large.
+\abovedisplayskip=3pt plus 3pt minus 0pt
+
+\BBB{Lowercase Greek letters}
+$$\halign{\hbox to.5\hsize{\2{#}}&\2{#}\cr
+digamma&varkappa\cr}$$
+
+\BBB{Hebrew letters}
+$$\halign{\hbox to.5\hsize{\2{#}}&\2{#}\cr
+beth&gimel\cr
+daleth\cr
+}$$
+
+\BBB{Miscellaneous symbols}
+$$\halign{\hbox to.5\hsize{\2{#}}&\2{#}\cr
+\omit\4{hbar}&backprime\cr
+hslash&varnothing\cr
+vartriangle&blacktriangle\cr
+triangledown&blacktriangledown\cr
+square&blacksquare\cr
+lozenge&blacklozenge\cr
+circledS&bigstar\cr
+\omit\4{angle}&sphericalangle\cr
+measuredangle&\omit\cr
+nexists&complement\cr
+mho&eth\cr
+Finv&diagup\cr
+Game&diagdown\cr
+Bbbk&\omit\cr
+}$$
+
+\BBB{Binary operators}
+$$\halign{\hbox to.5\hsize{\2{#}}&\2{#}\cr
+dotplus&ltimes\cr
+smallsetminus&rtimes\cr
+\omit\3{Cap}{doublecap}&leftthreetimes\cr
+\omit\3{Cup}{doublecup}&rightthreetimes\cr
+barwedge&curlywedge\cr
+veebar&curlyvee\cr
+doublebarwedge\cr
+boxminus&circleddash\cr
+boxtimes&circledast\cr
+boxdot&circledcirc\cr
+boxplus&centerdot\cr
+divideontimes&intercal\cr}
+$$
+
+\BBB{Binary relations}
+$$\halign{\hbox to.5\hsize{\2{#}}&\2{#}\cr
+leqq&geqq\cr
+leqslant&geqslant\cr
+eqslantless&eqslantgtr\cr
+lesssim&gtrsim\cr
+lessapprox&gtrapprox\cr
+approxeq\cr
+lessdot&gtrdot\cr
+\omit\3{lll}{llless}&\omit\3{ggg}{gggtr}\cr
+lessgtr&gtrless\cr
+lesseqgtr&gtreqless\cr
+lesseqqgtr&gtreqqless\cr
+\omit\3{doteqdot}{Doteq}&eqcirc\cr
+risingdotseq&circeq\cr
+fallingdotseq&triangleq\cr
+backsim&thicksim\cr
+backsimeq&thickapprox\cr
+subseteqq&supseteqq\cr
+Subset&Supset\cr
+sqsubset&sqsupset\cr
+preccurlyeq&succcurlyeq\cr
+curlyeqprec&curlyeqsucc\cr
+precsim&succsim\cr
+precapprox&succapprox\cr
+vartriangleleft&vartriangleright\cr
+trianglelefteq&trianglerighteq\cr
+vDash&Vdash\cr
+Vvdash\cr
+smallsmile&shortmid\cr
+smallfrown&shortparallel\cr
+bumpeq&between\cr
+Bumpeq&pitchfork\cr
+varpropto&backepsilon\cr
+blacktriangleleft&blacktriangleright\cr
+therefore&because\cr}$$
+\bigbreak
+\BBB{Negated relations}
+$$\halign{\hbox to.5\hsize{\2{#}}&\2{#}\cr
+nless&ngtr\cr
+nleq&ngeq\cr
+nleqslant&ngeqslant\cr
+nleqq&ngeqq\cr
+lneq&gneq\cr
+lneqq&gneqq\cr
+lvertneqq&gvertneqq\cr
+lnsim&gnsim\cr
+lnapprox&gnapprox\cr
+nprec&nsucc\cr
+npreceq&nsucceq\cr
+precneqq&succneqq\cr
+precnsim&succnsim\cr
+precnapprox&succnapprox\cr
+nsim&ncong\cr
+nshortmid&nshortparallel\cr
+nmid&nparallel\cr
+nvdash&nvDash\cr
+nVdash&nVDash\cr
+ntriangleleft&ntriangleright\cr
+ntrianglelefteq&ntrianglerighteq\cr
+nsubseteq&nsupseteq\cr
+nsubseteqq&nsupseteqq\cr
+subsetneq&supsetneq\cr
+varsubsetneq&varsupsetneq\cr
+subsetneqq&supsetneqq\cr
+varsubsetneqq&varsupsetneqq\cr}$$
+
+\overfullrule=0pt
+
+\BBB{Arrows}
+$$\halign{\hbox to.5\hsize{\2{#}}&\2{#}\cr
+leftleftarrows&rightrightarrows\cr
+leftrightarrows&rightleftarrows\cr
+Lleftarrow&Rrightarrow\cr
+twoheadleftarrow&twoheadrightarrow\cr
+leftarrowtail&rightarrowtail\cr
+looparrowleft&looparrowright\cr
+leftrightharpoons&\omit\4{rightleftharpoons}\cr
+curvearrowleft&curvearrowright\cr
+circlearrowleft&circlearrowright\cr
+Lsh&Rsh\cr
+upuparrows&downdownarrows\cr
+%      Some fancy tricks to avoid a lot of extra work.  MJD
+upharpoonleft&upharpoonright}\setbox0\lastbox\unhbox0\unskip,\hfill{\cr
+downharpoonleft&\omit\kern7em \cs{restriction}\hfil\cr
+multimap&downharpoonright\cr
+leftrightsquigarrow&rightsquigarrow\cr}$$
+
+\BBB{Negated arrows}
+$$\halign{\hbox to.5\hsize{\2{#}}&\2{#}\cr
+nleftarrow&nrightarrow\cr
+nLeftarrow&nRightarrow\cr
+nleftrightarrow&nLeftrightarrow\cr}$$
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\head 6. Other Things You Ought to Know
+\endhead
+
+\subhead Errata to \JoT{} prior to \AmSTeX{} 2.0
+\endsubhead
+
+The file \filnam{joyerr.tex} contains the full list of errata for the
+first edition of \JoT{}, for versions of \AmSTeX{} earlier than
+version 2.0; \filnam{joyerr2.tex} contains the errata for the second
+edition.  A user who desires a typeset copy of this file may run it
+through \TeX{} and print out the \filnam{.dvi} file.  This will
+require Version~2.0+ of \AmSTeX{} and \filnam{amsppt.sty}, and also
+AMSFonts Version~2.0+ (users of AMSFonts Version~2.0 are strongly
+encouraged to upgrade to Version~2.2).
+
+
+\subhead Acknowledging the Use of \AmSTeX{}\endsubhead
+
+The following are suggested as appropriate statements of acknowledgment
+that \AmSTeX{} has been used to format a document for publication.
+It is not required that such an acknowledgment be made.
+
+\penalty-9000 % to encourage a break without absolutely forcing it.
+A single paper may include the following at the bottom of the first page:
+\beginexample{}
+\rm{}Typeset by \AmSTeX{}
+\endexample
+\noindent
+(This notation is provided automatically by the \AmSTeX{} preprint style.
+It can be suppressed by the command \cs{nologo} in the preamble.)
+
+If an entire journal or book is prepared with \AmSTeX{}, the following
+statement can be placed on its copyright page:
+\beginexample{}
+\rm{}This [journal/book] was typeset by \AmSTeX{}, the \TeX{} macro %
+system of the \AMS{}.
+\endexample
+
+If only selected papers in a journal or book are set with \AmSTeX{}, these
+papers may be identified as shown above, and the following may be placed
+on the copyright page:
+\beginexample{}
+\rm{}\AmSTeX{} is the \TeX{} macro system of the \AMS{}.
+\endexample
+
+
+\head 7. Getting Help
+\endhead
+
+If you should find any bugs in the macros or documentation,
+send a Problem Report to:
+\beginexample{\rm}
+Technical Support
+\AMS{}
+P. O. Box 6248
+Providence, RI 02940
+\vskip 2pt %
+Phone: 800-321-4AMS (4267) \quad or \quad 401-455-4080
+E-mail: tech-support\@ams.org
+\endexample
+
+A Problem Report should contain the following information:
+\roster
+\item version and date of \filnam{amstex.tex} and of \filnam{amsppt.sty}
+  with which the problem occurred;
+\item a detailed description of the problem;
+\item a brief input file which includes the input code for
+  one or more examples that illustrate the problem;
+\item a log file of the \TeX{} session for the input file showing the problem.
+\endroster
+
+\head References\endhead
+
+\noindent\hangindent2pc Knuth, Donald E. {\it The \TeX{}book}. Reading:
+  Addison Wesley, 1986.
+
+\noindent\hangindent2pc Spivak, Michael D. {\it The Joy of \TeX{}},
+  2nd (revised) edition, \AMS{}, Providence, 1990.
+
+\noindent\hangindent2pc {\it Instructions for Preparation of Papers and
+  Monographs: \AmSTeX}, version 2.2, \AMS{}, Providence, 2001.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+
+%  Arrange for the sample references to be set broadside, with the output
+%  pasted up next to the corresponding input.  The section heading should
+%  be full-width, and the running heads should be the normal page width.
+%  To accomplish the latter, we must redefine plain's \makeheadline.
+
+\begingroup % This will be ended after the broadside section
+
+% To suppress an unimportant `overfull vbox' message (0.8 points):
+\vfuzz=1pt
+
+% Retain headlines at usual width while decreasing \hsize.
+\newdimen\headlinewidth
+\headlinewidth=\hsize
+\def\makeheadline{%
+  \leftskip=0pt
+  \vbox{\vbox to\headlineheight{\vss
+      \hbox to\headlinewidth{\hskip0pt plus\headlinewidth\the\headline}%
+      \kern-\prevdepth}
+    \vskip\headlinespace \vskip-\topskip}%
+  \nointerlineskip}
+
+\head Appendix A.\quad Sample Bibliography Input and Output
+\endhead
+
+%  This measurement includes the space for the running head.
+\pageheight{32pc}
+
+\pagewidth{23pc}
+\beginexample{\exindent=0pt}
+\\Refs
+\\ref\\key 4 \% assuming \\refstyle\{C\}
+\\by V. I. Arnol\$'\$d, A. N. Varchenko,
+\ and S. M. Guse\\u\\i n-Zade
+\\book Singularities of differentiable maps.~\\rom I
+\\publ ``Nauka'' \\publaddr Moscow \\yr 1982
+\\lang Russian
+\\endref
+\ {}
+\\ref\\key 5\\bysame
+\\book Singularities of differentiable maps.~\\rom\{II\}
+\\publ ``Nauka'' \\publaddr Moscow \\yr 1984
+\\lang Russian
+\\endref
+\ {}
+\\ref\\key 6
+\\by O. A. Ladyzhenskaya
+\\book Mathematical problems in the dynamics
+\ of a viscous incompressible fluid
+\\bookinfo 2nd rev. aug. ed.
+\\publ ``Nauka'' \\publaddr Moscow \\yr 1970
+\\lang Russian
+\\transl English transl. of 1st ed.
+\\book The mathematical theory of viscous
+\ incompressible flow
+\\publ Gordon and Breach \\publaddr New York
+\\yr 1963; rev. 1969
+\\endref
+\endexample
+
+\newpage
+
+\beginexample{\exindent=0pt}
+\\ref\\key 7
+\\by P. D. Lax and C. D. Levermore
+\\paper The small dispersion limit for the
+\ KdV equation.~\\rom I
+\\jour Comm. Pure Appl. Math. \\vol 36 \\yr 1983
+\\pages 253--290 \\finalinfo (overview)
+\\moreref\\paper \\rom\{II\}
+\\jour Comm. Pure Appl. Math.
+\\vol 36 \\yr 1983 \\pages 571--594
+\\moreref\\paper \\rom\{III\}
+\\jour Comm. Pure Appl. Math.
+\\vol 36 \\yr 1983 \\pages 809--829 \\endref
+\ {}
+\\ref\\key 10 \\by S. Osher
+\\paper Shock capturing algorithms for equations of
+\ mixed type
+\\inbook Numerical Methods for Partial Differential
+\ Equations \\eds S. I. Hariharan and T. H. Moulton
+\\publ Longman \\publaddr New York \\yr 1986
+\\pages 305--322
+\\endref
+\ {}
+\\ref\\key 17 \\by G. S. Petrov
+\\paper Elliptic integrals and their nonoscillatory
+\ behavior
+\\jour Funktsional. Anal. i Prilozhen.
+\\vol 20 \\yr 1986 \\pages 46--49
+\\transl\\nofrills English transl. in
+\\jour Functional Anal. Appl. \\vol 20\\yr 1986
+\\endref
+\endexample
+
+\newpage
+
+\beginexample{\exindent=0pt}
+\% switch to a different references style
+\\refstyle\{A\}
+\\widestnumber\\key\{GHMR\}
+\ {}
+\\ref\\key C1
+\\by B. Coomes
+\\book Polynomial flows, symmetry groups, and
+\ conditions sufficient for injectivity of maps
+\\bookinfo Ph.D. thesis, Univ. Nebraska--Lincoln
+\\yr 1988
+\\endref
+\ {}
+\\ref\\key C2
+\\bysame \% B. Coomes
+\\paper The Lorenz system does not have a
+\ polynomial flow
+\\jour J. Differential Equations
+\\toappear
+\\endref
+\ {}
+\\ref\\key GHMR
+\\by J. Guckenheimer, P. Holmes, M. Martineau,
+\ and L. P. Robinson
+\\book Nonlinear oscillations, dynamical systems,
+\ and bifurcations of vector fields
+\\bookinfo \% fields can be left blank
+\\publ Springer-Verlag \\publaddr New York
+\\yr 1983
+\\endRefs
+\endexample
+
+\newpage
+
+\begingroup
+\refstyle{C}
+\aboveheadskip=\abovedisplayskip
+
+\Refs
+\ref\key 4 % assuming \refstyle{C}
+\by V. I. Arnol$'$d, A. N. Varchenko, and S. M. Guse\u\i n-Zade
+\book Singularities of differentiable maps.~{\rm I}
+\publ ``Nauka'' \publaddr Moscow
+\yr 1982
+\lang Russian
+\endref
+
+\ref\key 5
+\bysame
+\book Singularities of differentiable maps.~{\rm II}
+\publ ``Nauka'' \publaddr Moscow
+\yr 1984
+\lang Russian
+\endref
+
+\ref\key 6
+\by O. A. Ladyzhenskaya
+\book Mathematical problems in the dynamics of a
+ viscous incompressible fluid
+\bookinfo 2nd rev. aug. ed.
+\publ ``Nauka'' \publaddr Moscow
+\yr 1970
+\lang Russian
+\transl English transl. of 1st ed.
+\book The mathematical theory of viscous
+incompressible flow
+\publ Gordon and Breach \publaddr New York
+\yr 1963; rev. 1969
+\endref
+
+\bigskip
+
+\ref\key 7
+\by P. D. Lax and C. D. Levermore
+\paper The small dispersion limit for the KdV equation.~{\rm I}
+\jour Comm. Pure Appl. Math.
+\vol 36 \yr 1983 \pages 253--290
+\finalinfo (overview)
+\moreref\paper {\rm II}
+\jour Comm. Pure Appl. Math.
+\vol 36 \yr 1983 \pages 571--594
+\moreref\paper {\rm III}
+\jour Comm. Pure Appl. Math.
+\vol 36 \yr 1983 \pages 809--829 \endref
+
+\ref\key 10 \by S. Osher
+\paper Shock capturing algorithms for equations of mixed type
+\inbook Numerical Methods for Partial Differential Equations
+\eds S. I. Hariharan and T. H. Moulton
+\publ Longman \publaddr New York \yr 1986 \pages 305--322
+\endref
+
+\ref\key 17 \by G. S. Petrov
+\paper Elliptic integrals and their nonoscillatory behavior
+\jour Funktsional. Anal. i Pri\-lo\-zhen.
+\vol 20 \yr 1986 \pages 46--49
+\transl\nofrills English transl. in \jour Functional Anal. Appl.
+\vol 20\yr 1986
+\endref
+
+\bigskip
+
+% switch to a different references style
+\refstyle{A}
+\widestnumber\key{GHMR}
+
+\ref\key C1
+\by B. Coomes
+\book Polynomial flows, symmetry groups, and conditions
+ sufficient for injectivity of maps
+\bookinfo Ph.D. thesis, Univ. Nebraska--Lincoln
+\yr 1988
+\endref
+
+\ref\key C2
+\bysame % B. Coomes
+\paper The Lorenz system does not have a polynomial flow
+\jour J. Differential Equations
+\toappear
+\endref
+
+\ref\key GHMR
+\by J. Guckenheimer, P. Holmes, M. Martineau, and L. P. Robinson
+\book Nonlinear oscillations, dynamical systems, and
+ bifurcations of vector fields
+\bookinfo % fields can be left blank
+\publ Springer-Verlag \publaddr New York
+\yr 1983
+\endref
+\endRefs
+
+\endgroup       % end special value of \aboveheadskip
+
+
+\newpage
+\endgroup % end broadside section
+
+% Put the page number at the bottom of the page:
+\csname firstpage\string @true\endcsname
+% Turn off the "Typeset by AmSTeX" logo:
+%\expandafter\redefine\csname logo\string @\endcsname{}
+\nologo
+
+% Reset the page number because the broadside pages in
+% the previous section will become three pages instead of four.
+% 18-JAN-1991 mjd
+\advance\pageno by -1
+
+%      The following file contains the installation instructions
+\input amstinst.tex
+
+\enddocument
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsppt.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsppt.doc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2338453d289
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsppt.doc
@@ -0,0 +1,3399 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @AMSTeX-style-file{
+%%%   filename  = "amsppt.sty",
+\def\filename{amsppt.sty}
+%     filename  = "amsppt.doc",
+%%%   version   = "2.2",
+\def\fileversion{2.2}
+%%%   date      = "2001/08/07",
+\def\filedate{2001/08/07}
+%%%   time      = "13:47:28 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "45523 3399 17317 143562",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 2001 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy
+%%%                    including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                    to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%%                P. O. Box 6248,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02940,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   keywords  = "amstex, ams-tex, tex",
+%%%   abstract  = "This file is a documentstyle for use with
+%%%                AMS-TeX 2.2. It exists in two forms: amsppt.doc,
+%%%                which is the full form containing all technical
+%%%                documentation, and amsppt.sty, which is identical
+%%%                except that all lines beginning with a single percent
+%%%                sign are removed, to make the file more rapid-loading
+%%%                when processed by TeX.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 checksum
+%%%                as the first value, followed by the equivalent of
+%%%                the standard UNIX wc (word count) utility output of
+%%%                lines, words, and characters.  This is produced by
+%%%                Robert Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%       -0- CONTENTS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%       -0- Contents
+%       -1- Preliminary
+%       -2- Utility definitions
+%       -3- Fonts
+%       -4- Global variable settings
+%       -5- Top matter definitions
+%       -6- Section headings
+%       -7- Theorem environments and similar structures
+%       -8- Rosters
+%       -9- Footnotes
+%      -10- Tables
+%      -11- Figure spaces and captions
+%      -12- Miscellaneous formatting macros
+%      -13- References/Bibliography
+%      -14- End of document
+%      -15- Output routine
+%      -16- Hyphenation exceptions
+%      -17- Notes
+%      -18- Appendix: Notes on version 2.1
+%      -19- Appendix: Notes on versions 2.1a, 2.1b, ...
+%      -20- Appendix: Notes on versions 2.2
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%       -1- PRELIMINARY
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%      AMSPPT.DOC contains all the code for AMSPPT.STY, with
+%      additional comments. AMSPPT.STY is produced by removing from
+%      AMSPPT.DOC all blank lines and lines beginning with a percent
+%      sign.  This is done to allow it to be loaded faster by TeX.
+%
+%      For the most part the internals of AMSPPT.STY aren't closely
+%      related to AMSTEX.TEX: AMSTEX.TEX handles mathematics,
+%      AMSPPT.STY handles visual design and overall structure of
+%      documents.  But some parts of AMSTEX.DOC are relevant, e.g.,
+%      the standard abbreviations \DN@, \RIfM@, etc., the description
+%      of "compressed format", the remarks about the "K-method", and
+%      the allocation of scratch registers and variables such as
+%      \toks@@.
+%
+%      The style produced by AMSPPT.STY is based on the style of the
+%      Journal of the American Mathematical Society (as of December
+%      1990), but is not intended to reproduce it exactly.  For one
+%      thing, most users of AMSPPT.STY will probably have Computer
+%      Modern fonts, while the Journal of the AMS in 1990 used Times
+%      Roman fonts licensed from Autologic, Inc.  This means that line
+%      breaks and page breaks were sure to change when a paper was
+%      submitted to the AMS.  For another thing, preprints naturally
+%      differ in some respects from articles in final published form:
+%      published articles generally have the journal name, volume and
+%      year of publication somewhere on the first page, a ``received
+%      by the editors'' date, subject classification numbers, perhaps
+%      key words and phrases, and an abstract, none of which are
+%      necessary in a preprint (though the last few are sometimes
+%      present).  In addition, the Journal of the AMS has a few
+%      idiosyncrasies such as placement of the abstract at the end of
+%      an article rather than at the beginning, and a non-zero value
+%      of \mathsurround, which were deemed inappropriate for inclusion
+%      in the preprint style (in particular, a non-zero \mathsurround
+%      would require the user to do extra work in certain situations
+%      to cancel unwanted side effects).  Since we are not matching
+%      the style of the Journal of the AMS exactly, we sometimes have
+%      rounded off measurements in AMSPPT.STY to convenient amounts
+%      such as \bigskipamount and \medskipamount or the nearest whole
+%      or half pica.  For example \belowheadskip is 7pt in the Journal
+%      of the AMS, but AMSPPT.STY uses 6pt (half a pica).
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%     Bug in amsppt.sty version 2.1 left \amsppt.sty = \endinput
+%     after the file was loaded. This will fix it if amsppt.sty
+%     was put in the format file.
+%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname amsppt.sty\endcsname\endinput
+  \expandafter\def\csname amsppt.sty\endcsname{2.2 (2001/08/07)}\fi
+%
+%    Check to see if this file was previously loaded and, if so,
+%    if the version numbers agree.
+%
+\xdef\fileversiontest{\fileversion\space(\filedate)}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname\filename\endcsname\fileversiontest
+%    Then file is already loaded, and versions agree. Quit here.
+%    \endinput and \fi MUST be on the same line:
+  \message{[already loaded]}\endinput\fi
+%
+%    If the file versions disagree, we generate an error message,
+%    but we don't do an \endinput: maybe the user will want to
+%    continue, inputting the new version, and see what happens.
+%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname\filename\endcsname\relax % file not yet loaded
+  \else\errmessage{Discrepancy in `\filename' file versions:
+     version \csname\filename\endcsname\space already loaded, trying
+     now to load version \fileversiontest}\fi
+%
+%    Since we are about to change the catcode of @, we define
+%    \csname\filename\endcsname to set the catcode back to its previous
+%    value. Furthermore, it then redefines itself to record the file
+%    version number for future reference (e.g., the test above).
+%
+\expandafter\xdef\csname\filename\endcsname{%
+  \catcode`\noexpand\@=\the\catcode`\@
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname\filename\endcsname{%
+     \fileversion\space(\filedate)}}
+%
+%    Add @ to the plain list of \dospecials, to make it behave
+%    better in verbatim, e-mail addresses, and URL's.
+%
+\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~\do\@}
+%
+%    Enable the use of @ as letter in `private' control sequence names.
+%    Cf. TeXbook, p. 344 (above the \mathcode table).
+%
+\catcode`\@=11
+%
+%    For convenience in loading other files of definitions, provide
+%    commands to save and restore the catcode value of any character,
+%    most commonly @.
+%
+\def\savecat#1{%
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname\string#1savedcat\endcsname{\the\catcode`#1}}
+\def\restorecat#1{\catcode`#1=\csname\string#1savedcat\endcsname}
+%
+%    Besides putting the file version on screen, this message also
+%    records it in the transcript/log file (which is useful for
+%    troubleshooting). The file name was already given on screen and in
+%    the transcript file by TeX, as part of the automatic processing
+%    surrounding file input.
+%
+\message{version \fileversion\space(\filedate):}
+%
+%    If another documentstyle inputs amsppt.sty, it should define
+%    \styname and \styversion appropriately. We use an `ifundefined'
+%    test to avoid overriding the definitions, in that case.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname styname\endcsname\relax
+  \def\styname{AMSPPT}\def\styversion{2.2}
+\fi
+%
+%      In AMSPPT.STY we follow the convention in amstex.tex of
+%      appending @ signs at the end of control sequences, rather than
+%      substituting @ signs for vowels as is frequently done in
+%      plain.tex.
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -2- UTILITY DEFINITIONS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{Loading utility definitions,}
+%
+%      For several macros, e.g., \title, we want to allow the user the
+%      following two options:
+%
+%      \title xxx\endtitle
+%      \title\nofrills xxx\endtitle
+%
+%      In the first case, we want the text of the title to be stored
+%      in a box for later use.  In the second case, we want certain
+%      parts of the typesetting to be omitted when constructing the
+%      box.  Internally this is done by prefixing them with \frills@,
+%      which in the normal cases is simply an identity function
+%      (\let\frills@\identity@), whereas in the nofrills case it
+%      gobbles its argument (\let\frills@\eat@).
+%
+%      In order to test for \nofrills we have to use \futurelet
+%      (because if \nofrills is absent, we don't want to do anything
+%      that might affect the actual text of the title, such as
+%      stripping braces or adding an unwanted extra pair around the
+%      first token or group).
+%
+\def\identity@#1{#1}
+%
+\def\nofrills@@#1{%
+%      This extra step in defining \next@ is a precaution in case #1
+%      might be more than one token.
+ \DN@{#1}%
+ \ifx\next\nofrills \let\frills@\eat@
+   \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\next@\expandafter\eat@
+  \else \let\frills@\identity@\expandafter\next@\fi}
+%
+\def\nofrillscheck#1{\def\nofrills@{\nofrills@@{#1}}%
+  \futurelet\next\nofrills@}
+%
+%      Typical use: if we want to execute a macro called \title, but
+%      check to see if \nofrills is coming up next, we do this:
+%
+%      ... \nofrillscheck\title
+%
+%      If indeed the next thing is \nofrills, then we will execute
+%      \nofrills@@ before calling \title again.  This involves some
+%      shuffling around in order for us to get back the ``real''
+%      definition of \title afterwards and yet still be able to use a
+%      control sequence named \title to read the argument. This is
+%      important in giving the user a useful error message if they
+%      accidentally omit or misspell the matching \endtitle or
+%      whatever. We could use instead the trick used with \align of
+%      adding a space onto the \csname with which we read the
+%      argument, but that would increase the use of hash size.
+%
+%      We define \usualspace to give a warning message if used in
+%      a place where it's not intended to be used:
+%
+\Invalid@\usualspace
+%
+%      Facility for adding to a token list, providing it was named
+%      with the particular naming convention that we require: an
+%      additional @ sign at the end of the control sequence name.
+%      Usage: \addto\tenpoint{...}
+%
+\def\addto#1#2{\csname \expandafter\eat@\string#1@\endcsname
+  \expandafter{\the\csname \expandafter\eat@\string#1@\endcsname#2}}
+%
+%      Fix Plain's \big, \Big, etc. macros so that they can scale with
+%      size changes.  The relations in \tenpoint are:
+%
+%             total    height above
+%             height   baseline
+%      --------------------------------------------------------------
+%      \big:   12pt    8.5   (12/2 = 6, + 2.5 (height of math axis))
+%      \Big:   18pt    11.5  (18/2 = 9, + 2.5 (height of math axis))
+%      \bigg:  24pt    14.5  (24/2 = 12, + 2.5 (height of math axis))
+%      \Bigg:  30pt    17.5  (30/2 = 15, + 2.5 (height of math axis))
+%
+%      In \tenpoint \bigsize@ will be set to 12pt, the height of an
+%      ordinary parenthesis in the roman font, x 1.2
+\newdimen\bigsize@
+%
+%      Using \vcenter automatically factors the height of the math
+%      axis into our sizing.  We set \nulldelimiterspace to zero,
+%      since we only want the delimiterspace from the \left delimiter.
+%
+\def\big@#1#2{{\hbox{$\left#2\vcenter to#1\bigsize@{}%
+  \right.\nulldelimiterspace\z@\m@th$}}}
+\def\big{\big@\@ne}
+\def\Big{\big@{1.5}}
+\def\bigg{\big@\tw@}
+\def\Bigg{\big@{2.5}}
+%
+%      Definition almost verbatim from TeXbook p. 317.  This is used
+%      in several places, currently (28-DEC-1989) including \head,
+%      \title, \author, \dedicatory, \affil, and \topcaption.
+%
+\def\raggedcenter@{\leftskip\z@ plus.4\hsize \rightskip\leftskip
+  \parfillskip\z@ \parindent\z@ \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em
+  \pretolerance9999\tolerance9999 \exhyphenpenalty\@M
+  \hyphenpenalty\@M \let\\\linebreak}
+%
+%      We now define a version of \uppercase that sidesteps any math,
+%      to prevent uppercasing math variables.  In order to be handled
+%      properly the $..$ must be on the outer level (not enclosed in
+%      braces) but this is the usual case in our applications of
+%      \uppercasetext@. Also we increase inter-word space in the
+%      uppercase text. Footnotes are not handled by
+%      \uppercasetext@---a footnote within a \title would have to be
+%      done by using \footnotemark within the title and \footnotetext
+%      after. In most cases footnotes within a title are something for
+%      which the author should use \thanks or \affil or \address
+%      instead.
+%
+%      One other little problem: uppercasing of a few special
+%      characters like the German "ss" and the undotted i and j (\i
+%      and \j), used sometimes with accents.  We do some reassignments
+%      here to handle these.  We don't worry about restoring the
+%      lowercase special characters within math embedded in the text
+%      being uppercased---it's conceivable that someone might want to
+%      use them there, but too unlikely to need providing for.
+%      (Undotted i and j in math would be typed as \imath and \jmath,
+%      not as \i and \j.)
+%
+%      This is what plain.tex has for the special characters:
+%
+% \chardef\ss="19 \chardef\ae="1A \chardef\oe="1B \chardef\o="1C
+% \chardef\AE="1D \chardef\OE="1E \chardef\O="1F
+% \chardef\i="10 \chardef\j="11 % dotless letters
+% \def\aa{\accent23a}
+% \def\AA{\leavevmode\setbox0\hbox{h}\dimen@\ht0\advance\dimen@-1ex%
+%   \rlap{\raise.67\dimen@\hbox{\char'27}}A}
+% \def\l{\char32l}
+% \def\L{\leavevmode\setbox0\hbox{L}\hbox to\wd0{\hss\char32L}}
+%
+\def\uppercasetext@#1{%
+   {\spaceskip1.3\fontdimen2\the\font plus1.3\fontdimen3\the\font
+    \def\ss{SS}\let\i=I\let\j=J\let\ae\AE\let\oe\OE
+    \let\o\O\let\aa\AA\let\l\L
+    \skipmath@#1$\skipmath@$}}
+%
+\def\skipmath@#1$#2${\uppercase{#1}%
+  \ifx\skipmath@#2\else$#2$\expandafter\skipmath@\fi}
+%
+%      Macro to check for missing \endsomething.
+\def\add@missing#1{\expandafter\ifx\envir@end#1%
+  \Err@{You seem to have a missing or misspelled
+  \expandafter\string\envir@end ...}%
+%      It is useful to supply the necessary missing piece, especially
+%      in the case of \endref.
+  \envir@end
+\fi}
+%
+%      \revert@ and \envir@stack are for use by any environments that
+%      don't enclose their text in a group, e.g., \proclaim,
+%      \definition, \roster.
+%
+\newtoks\revert@
+%
+\def\envir@stack#1{\toks@\expandafter{\envir@end}%
+  \edef\next@{\def\noexpand\envir@end{\the\toks@}%
+    \revert@{\the\revert@}}%
+  \revert@\expandafter{\next@}%
+  \def\envir@end{#1}}
+%
+%      Some special trickery is necessary to get around the outerness
+%      of \enddocument
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\ =11
+\gdef\revert@envir#1{\expandafter\ifx\envir@end#1%
+%      restore previous \envir@end:
+\the\revert@%
+%      The space after \enddocument is significant:
+\else\ifx\envir@end\enddocument \Err@{Extra \string#1}%
+\else\expandafter\add@missing\envir@end\revert@envir#1%
+\fi\fi}
+%      This definition can be made here because \enddocument  has not
+%      yet been declared \outer.
+%      The space at the end of \enddocument is necessary:
+\xdef\enddocument {\string\enddocument}%
+%      The space at the end of \enddocument is necessary here also:
+\global\let\envir@end\enddocument %%%%%% don't remove the final space!
+\endgroup\relax
+%
+\def\first@#1#2\end{#1}
+\def\true@{TT}
+\def\false@{TF}
+\def\empty@{}
+%
+%      Test to see whether a given argument is empty or not.  If the
+%      argument = a single space, it will test the same as empty,
+%      which is in fact what we want.
+%
+\begingroup  \catcode`\-=3
+\long\gdef\notempty#1{%
+%      \empty@ is needed if we want the case #1 = {} to work properly:
+  \expandafter\ifx\first@#1-\end-\empty@ \false@\else \true@\fi}
+\endgroup
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -3- FONTS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{more fonts,}
+%      Load some fonts that are not loaded in plain.tex, or only
+%      preloaded (which means that the font information is in TeX's
+%      memory but a control sequence name for the font still needs to
+%      be assigned). plain.tex only loads cmex10, because originally
+%      that was the only size available.  So we load cmex7 and later
+%      cmex8, but we don't load any smaller sizes, in order to
+%      conserve font memory; a need for the extension font in sizes
+%      smaller than 7-point is most unusual.  For subscript sums or
+%      other extension symbols in eightpoint text we will use cmex7
+%      rather than cmex6, to allow us to get away without loading
+%      cmex6.
+%
+%      We use \font@, not simply \font, so that these fonts will be
+%      handled properly by AMS-TeX's syntax check.
+%
+\font@\tensmc=cmcsc10 \relax
+%
+%      \sevenex, and \eightex below, must be able to be interpreted
+%      as math fonts for certain initialization (e.g. establishing
+%      the height of the strut in \eightpoint) that may be requested
+%      before \topmatter is invoked, and the fonts are actually loaded.
+%
+\let\sevenex=\tenex % needs special handling in \PSAMSFonts
+%
+%      We need cmti7 in case \italic is used in a subscript or
+%      superscript. Once again we will conserve font space by not
+%      loading cmti6 or cmti5, and declare the \scriptfont in
+%      \eightpoint to be cmti7 rather than cmti6.  At least until we
+%      know that users actually are using \italic in sub-subscript
+%      size.
+%
+\font@\sevenit=cmti7 \relax
+%
+%      We have to load a lot of other fonts for eight-point text
+%      (footnotes, abstracts, bibliography).  Note that cmti and cmsl
+%      in sizes 5, 6 don't get loaded, since they may not exist (cmti7
+%      is one of the standard 75 Computer Modern fonts, but cmti5 and
+%      cmti6 aren't, nor are any of cmsl5, cmsl6, cmsl7).  AMSPPT
+%      provides for ten-point and eight-point font sets;
+%
+\font@\eightrm=cmr8 \relax % preloaded in plain.tex
+\font@\sixrm=cmr6 \relax % preloaded in plain.tex
+\font@\eighti=cmmi8 \relax     \skewchar\eighti='177 % preloaded
+\font@\sixi=cmmi6 \relax       \skewchar\sixi='177   % preloaded
+\font@\eightsy=cmsy8 \relax    \skewchar\eightsy='60 % preloaded
+\font@\sixsy=cmsy6 \relax      \skewchar\sixsy='60   % preloaded
+\let\eightex=\tenex % needs special handling in \PSAMSFonts
+\font@\eightbf=cmbx8 \relax % preloaded in plain.tex
+\font@\sixbf=cmbx6 \relax   % preloaded in plain.tex
+\font@\eightit=cmti8 \relax % preloaded in plain.tex
+\font@\eightsl=cmsl8 \relax % preloaded in plain.tex
+\font@\eighttt=cmtt8 \relax % preloaded in plain.tex
+\let\eightsmc=\nullfont % needs special handling in \PSAMSFonts
+%
+%      Now we define \tenpoint and \eightpoint for regular text and
+%      footnotes, similarly to the TeXbook, p. 414.  We not only
+%      change the \baselineskip, but also change the glue above and
+%      below displayed formulas, in case an abstract or footnote
+%      happens to have them.  We also need to set not only \strutbox,
+%      but also \strutbox@. The height of \strutbox@ is the height of
+%      \strutbox, minus the value of \normallineskiplimit.  And we
+%      will set \ex@ in each case (for \tenpoint it is supposed to be
+%      equivalent to 1pt, while for \eightpoint it will then
+%      presumably be equivalent to .8pt).
+%
+%      When \ifsyntax@ is true, so that we are checking syntax, then
+%      we won't bother specifying fonts (since we would only change
+%      them all to \dummyft@ anyway), and we simply let \big and its
+%      variants gobble up things with the proper syntax, instead of
+%      worrying about getting the right sizes.
+%
+%      \tenpoint@ is a hook where new material can be added.
+%      \topmatter makes use of this.  Note that to change the
+%      baselineskip to say 14pt, one should say
+%
+%      \addto\tenpoint{\normalbaselineskip14pt\normalbaselines}
+%
+%      rather than just \addto\tenpoint{\baselineskip14pt}
+%
+\newtoks\tenpoint@
+%
+\def\tenpoint{\normalbaselineskip12\p@
+ \abovedisplayskip12\p@ plus3\p@ minus9\p@
+ \belowdisplayskip\abovedisplayskip
+ \abovedisplayshortskip\z@ plus3\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip7\p@ plus3\p@ minus4\p@
+ \textonlyfont@\rm\tenrm \textonlyfont@\it\tenit
+ \textonlyfont@\sl\tensl \textonlyfont@\bf\tenbf
+ \textonlyfont@\smc\tensmc \textonlyfont@\tt\tentt
+ \ifsyntax@ \def\big##1{{\hbox{$\left##1\right.$}}}%
+  \let\Big\big \let\bigg\big \let\Bigg\big
+ \else
+   \textfont\z@\tenrm  \scriptfont\z@\sevenrm
+       \scriptscriptfont\z@\fiverm
+   \textfont\@ne\teni  \scriptfont\@ne\seveni
+       \scriptscriptfont\@ne\fivei
+   \textfont\tw@\tensy \scriptfont\tw@\sevensy
+       \scriptscriptfont\tw@\fivesy
+   \textfont\thr@@\tenex \scriptfont\thr@@\sevenex
+        \scriptscriptfont\thr@@\sevenex
+   \textfont\itfam\tenit \scriptfont\itfam\sevenit
+        \scriptscriptfont\itfam\sevenit
+   \textfont\bffam\tenbf \scriptfont\bffam\sevenbf
+        \scriptscriptfont\bffam\fivebf
+   \setbox\strutbox\hbox{\vrule height8.5\p@ depth3.5\p@ width\z@}%
+%      The height of \strutbox@ is supposed to be the height of
+%      \strutbox minus \normallineskip.  We take half from the top and
+%      half from the bottom.
+   \setbox\strutbox@\hbox{\lower.5\normallineskiplimit\vbox{%
+        \kern-\normallineskiplimit\copy\strutbox}}%
+%      We set \bigsize@ to the height of a parenthesis, times 1.2.
+%      \bigsize@ controls the height of \big, \Big, \bigg and \Bigg
+%      delimiters.
+   \setbox\z@\vbox{\hbox{$($}\kern\z@}\bigsize@1.2\ht\z@
+  \fi
+%      \ex@ is supposed to come out to 1pt; multiplication factor may
+%      need to be changed if Computer Modern is not being used. \jot,
+%      a dimen register usually used for extra spacing between lines
+%      of a multi-line displayed equation or similar structure, is
+%      reset to 3\ex@ (in plain.tex it is always 3pt, but in AMSPPT it
+%      may be reduced by \eightpoint).
+  \normalbaselines\rm\dotsspace@1.5mu\ex@.2326ex\jot3\ex@
+  \the\tenpoint@}
+%
+%      Like \tenpoint@, \eightpoint@ is a hook where extra material
+%      can be added to the definition of \eightpoint.
+%
+\newtoks\eightpoint@
+%
+\def\eightpoint{\normalbaselineskip10\p@
+ \abovedisplayskip10\p@ plus2.4\p@ minus7.2\p@
+ \belowdisplayskip\abovedisplayskip
+ \abovedisplayshortskip\z@ plus2.4\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip5.6\p@ plus2.4\p@ minus3.2\p@
+ \textonlyfont@\rm\eightrm \textonlyfont@\it\eightit
+ \textonlyfont@\sl\eightsl \textonlyfont@\bf\eightbf
+ \textonlyfont@\smc\eightsmc \textonlyfont@\tt\eighttt
+ \ifsyntax@\def\big##1{{\hbox{$\left##1\right.$}}}%
+  \let\Big\big \let\bigg\big \let\Bigg\big
+ \else
+  \textfont\z@\eightrm \scriptfont\z@\sixrm
+       \scriptscriptfont\z@\fiverm
+  \textfont\@ne\eighti \scriptfont\@ne\sixi
+       \scriptscriptfont\@ne\fivei
+  \textfont\tw@\eightsy \scriptfont\tw@\sixsy
+       \scriptscriptfont\tw@\fivesy
+%      The smallest size of the extension font currently available is
+%      7-point.
+  \textfont\thr@@\eightex \scriptfont\thr@@\sevenex
+   \scriptscriptfont\thr@@\sevenex
+  \textfont\itfam\eightit \scriptfont\itfam\sevenit
+   \scriptscriptfont\itfam\sevenit
+  \textfont\bffam\eightbf \scriptfont\bffam\sixbf
+   \scriptscriptfont\bffam\fivebf
+ \setbox\strutbox\hbox{\vrule height7\p@ depth3\p@ width\z@}%
+%      The height of \strutbox@ is supposed to be the height of
+%      \strutbox minus \normallineskip.  We take half from the top and
+%      half from the bottom.
+ \setbox\strutbox@\hbox{\raise.5\normallineskiplimit\vbox{%
+   \kern-\normallineskiplimit\copy\strutbox}}%
+%      We set \bigsize@ to the height of a parenthesis, times 1.2.
+%      \bigsize@ controls the height of \big, \Big, \bigg and \Bigg
+%      delimiters.
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\hbox{$($}\kern\z@}\bigsize@1.2\ht\z@
+ \fi
+%      \ex@ is supposed to come out to .8pt; multiplication factor may
+%      need to be changed if Computer Modern is not being used. \jot,
+%      a dimen register usually used for extra spacing between lines
+%      of a multi-line displayed equation or similar structure, is
+%      reset to 3\ex@ (in plain.tex it is 3pt).
+ \normalbaselines\eightrm\dotsspace@1.5mu\ex@.2326ex\jot3\ex@
+ \the\eightpoint@}
+%
+%      \linespacing command to introduce a factor by which
+%      \normalbaselineskip will be multiplied. Multiplying by the
+%      factor will cause any stretch or shrink to be lost; normally
+%      that's not a problem.
+\def\linespacing#1{%
+  \addto\tenpoint{\normalbaselineskip=#1\normalbaselineskip
+    \normalbaselines
+%      Reset the strut boxes.
+    \setbox\strutbox=\hbox{\vrule height.7\normalbaselineskip
+      depth.3\normalbaselineskip width\z@}%
+    \setbox\strutbox@\hbox{\raise.5\normallineskiplimit
+      \vbox{\kern-\normallineskiplimit\copy\strutbox}}%
+  }%
+  \addto\eightpoint{\normalbaselineskip=#1\normalbaselineskip
+    \normalbaselines
+%      Reset the strut boxes.
+    \setbox\strutbox=\hbox{\vrule height.7\normalbaselineskip
+      depth.3\normalbaselineskip width\z@}%
+    \setbox\strutbox@\hbox{\raise.5\normallineskiplimit
+      \vbox{\kern-\normallineskiplimit\copy\strutbox}}%
+  }%
+}
+%
+\def\extrafont@#1#2#3{\font#1=#2#3\relax}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Postscript versions of the math fonts from the AMSFonts
+%    package, done jointly by Blue Sky Research and Y&Y, come only
+%    in sizes 10, 7 and 5, i.e. sizes 9, 8 and 6 are not included.
+%
+%    \PSAMSFonts can be called in the initialization, or by a user
+%    before \document and \topmatter, to specify that sizes 9,8,6 of
+%    AMS fonts should be scaled from nearby PS sizes.
+%
+\newif\ifPSAMSFonts
+\def\PSAMSFonts{%
+  \def\extrafont@##1##2##3{%
+    \font##1=##2%
+%    Concatenate the proper size spec to the preceding letters
+      \ifnum##3=9 10 at9pt%
+      \else\ifnum##3=8 10 at8pt%
+      \else\ifnum##3=6 7 at6pt%
+%      Sizes other than 9, 8 or 6 are not expected, so this branch might
+%      generate an error:
+              \else ##3\fi\fi\fi\relax}%
+  \font@\eightsmc=cmcsc10 at 8pt
+  \font@\eightex=cmex10 at 8pt
+  \font@\sevenex=cmex10 at 7pt
+  \PSAMSFontstrue
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%    If the user has specified \loadeufb, \loadbold, \loadeusm,
+%    \loadeusm, \loadeurm, \loadeurb, we need to add eightpoint
+%    fonts.  We do this in \topmatter, and the user documentation
+%    instructs the user to include any \load... command between
+%    \documentstyle and \topmatter.
+%
+%    At the same time, if PSAMSFonts has not been specified, add the
+%    regular versions of the three fonts that need special handling.
+%
+\def\loadextrasizes@#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+ \ifx\undefined#1%
+ \else \extrafont@{#4}{#2}{8}\extrafont@{#6}{#2}{6}%
+   \ifsyntax@
+   \else
+     \addto\tenpoint{\textfont#1#3\scriptfont#1#5%
+       \scriptscriptfont#1#7}%
+    \addto\eightpoint{\textfont#1#4\scriptfont#1#6%
+       \scriptscriptfont#1#7}%
+   \fi
+ \fi
+}
+%
+%    Provide a mechanism for delaying additional font loading, which
+%    may be necessary for some publications.
+%
+\newtoks\loadextrafonts@@
+\def\loadextrafonts@{%
+  \loadextrasizes@\msafam{msam}%
+    \tenmsa\eightmsa\sevenmsa\sixmsa\fivemsa
+  \loadextrasizes@\msbfam{msbm}%
+    \tenmsb\eightmsb\sevenmsb\sixmsb\fivemsb
+  \loadextrasizes@\eufmfam{eufm}%
+    \teneufm\eighteufm\seveneufm\sixeufm\fiveeufm
+  \loadextrasizes@\eufbfam{eufb}%
+    \teneufb\eighteufb\seveneufb\sixeufb\fiveeufb
+  \loadextrasizes@\eusmfam{eusm}%
+    \teneusm\eighteusm\seveneusm\sixeusm\fiveeusm
+  \loadextrasizes@\eusbfam{eusb}%
+    \teneusb\eighteusb\seveneusb\sixeusb\fiveeusb
+  \loadextrasizes@\eurmfam{eurm}%
+    \teneurm\eighteurm\seveneurm\sixeurm\fiveeurm
+  \loadextrasizes@\eurbfam{eurb}%
+    \teneurb\eighteurb\seveneurb\sixeurb\fiveeurb
+  \loadextrasizes@\cmmibfam{cmmib}%
+    \tencmmib\eightcmmib\sevencmmib\sixcmmib\fivecmmib
+  \loadextrasizes@\cmbsyfam{cmbsy}%
+    \tencmbsy\eightcmbsy\sevencmbsy\sixcmbsy\fivecmbsy
+  \let\loadextrafonts@\empty@
+  \ifPSAMSFonts
+  \else
+    \font@\eightsmc=cmcsc8 \relax
+    \font@\eightex=cmex8 \relax
+    \font@\sevenex=cmex7 \relax
+  \fi
+  \the\loadextrafonts@@
+}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -4- GLOBAL VARIABLE SETTINGS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{page dimension settings,}
+%      First we set up some basic parameters, which are different than
+%      in plain.  These values are the ones currently in use (November
+%      1989) in the Journal of the AMS.
+%
+\parindent1pc
+\newdimen\normalparindent \normalparindent\parindent
+\normallineskiplimit\p@
+%
+%      We use a common indent value for setting left and right margins
+%      for abstract, table of contents, figure captions, and block
+%      environments. The name is chosen as if we are going to have
+%      several levels of indent, called \indenti, \indentii, ...; such
+%      names can be constructed using \csname and \romannumeral with a
+%      count register, which might be useful some time.
+%
+\newdimen\indenti \indenti=2pc
+%
+%      Change \magnification (from plain.tex) so that it doesn't reset the
+%      page dimensions to 6.5 x 9 true inches.
+\let\magnification=\mag
+%
+\topskip10pt \relax
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -5- TOP MATTER DEFINITIONS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{top matter,}
+%      After it's first called, since
+%      we do not need \topmatter any longer, we define it to be empty,
+%      to release the memory that the definition takes up.
+%
+\def\topmatter{\loadextrafonts@ \let\topmatter\relax}
+%
+%      \chapter is used within \title...\endtitle to produce something
+%      such as "CHAPTER II", centered above the main text of the
+%      chapter title. We do a little trickery with \afterassignment so
+%      that the user can remove not only the word "CHAPTER" but also
+%      the uppercasing and romannumeralizing by \nofrills.   Note that
+%      we can't use \ignorespaces after \chapter@ in the usual way
+%      because it would get in the way of the \count@ assignment.  In
+%      fact spaces will be ignored by the assignment operation, the
+%      only problem would be when \nofrills is used.
+%
+\def\chapterno@{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\chaptercount@}}
+%
+\newcount\chaptercount@
+%
+%      In order to avoid interfering with \topskip, we put the
+%      \chapter material in the first line of the title, and do some
+%      box and glue tricks to get it in position.
+%
+%      Perhaps need a test to make sure #1 is a number---if the user
+%      does \chapter{IV} instead of \chapter{4} they may not
+%      understand the error message they get.
+%
+%      \chaptercount@ assignment needs to be global because we are
+%      working from inside the first line of \title.
+%
+\def\chapter{\let\savedef@\chapter
+  \def\chapter##1{\let\chapter\savedef@
+  \leavevmode\hskip-\leftskip
+%      Put the \chapter stuff in an \rlap so it doesn't affect
+%      centering of the title, and in an "uplap" so it is placed above
+%      where we want it.
+   \rlap{\vbox to\z@{\vss\centerline{\eightpoint
+%      We do a baselineskip of 2pc from the base of the "CHAPTER"
+%      banner to the base of the first title line.  (The baseline of
+%      the \null will coincide with the baseline of the first title
+%      line.)
+   \frills@{CHAPTER\space\afterassignment\chapterno@
+       \global\chaptercount@=}%
+   ##1\unskip}\baselineskip2pc\null}}\hskip\leftskip}%
+ \nofrillscheck\chapter}
+%
+%      We store the title in a box using a \setbox.  It could also be
+%      done by defining \thetitle@.  One advantage of \setbox is that
+%      syntax errors within the title (say for math) are reported
+%      immediately instead of during the processing of \endtopmatter.
+%      The title box is always put on the page by \endtopmatter, even
+%      if it's empty. (With other pieces of the topmatter we check
+%      first to see whether there's any text to typeset and skip to
+%      the next item if not.) The text of the title is stored up for
+%      the running heads, unless \rightheadtoks is nonempty---then
+%      presumably the user has already used \rightheadtext to set the
+%      right-hand running head, in which case we leave it unchanged.
+%
+%      The default for titles is uppercasing.  From a design
+%      standpoint it might be preferable to do titles in 14-point text
+%      with initial caps, but since titles may potentially contain any
+%      kind of math, doing this would require a full-fledged
+%      \fourteenpoint analogous to \tenpoint.  So to give the title
+%      extra prominence we use uppercasing instead.  The uppercasing
+%      can be removed by \nofrills.
+%
+\newbox\titlebox@
+%
+\def\title{\let\savedef@\title
+%      We use a \vtop here because we want to know the height of the
+%      first line of the title when we start typesetting the
+%      topmatter, in order to get the correct sinkage from the top of
+%      the page.
+  \def\title##1\endtitle{\let\title\savedef@
+    \global\setbox\titlebox@\vtop{\tenpoint\bf
+      \raggedcenter@
+%      Increased \baselineskip is because of the uppercasing.  We do
+%      it like this instead of putting it inside the \uppercasetext@
+%      macro, because it only applies where an entire paragraph is
+%      made up of uppercase text.
+      \baselineskip1.3\baselineskip
+      \frills@\uppercasetext@{##1}\endgraf}%
+%      Check to see if right and left hand running heads have been
+%      already assigned by the user---if so, don't override.
+    \ifmonograph@
+      \edef\next{\the\leftheadtoks}\ifx\next\empty@ \leftheadtext{##1}\fi
+    \fi
+    \edef\next{\the\rightheadtoks}\ifx\next\empty@ \rightheadtext{##1}\fi
+  }%
+  \nofrillscheck\title}
+%
+%      Currently \author has no need for a \nofrills option, unlike
+%      \title, since uppercasing is not done.
+%
+\newbox\authorbox@
+\def\author#1\endauthor{\global\setbox\authorbox@
+  \vbox{\tenpoint\smc\raggedcenter@ #1\endgraf}\relaxnext@
+  \edef\next{\the\leftheadtoks}%
+  \ifx\next\empty@\leftheadtext{#1}\fi}
+%
+\newbox\affilbox@
+\def\affil#1\endaffil{\global\setbox\affilbox@
+  \vbox{\tenpoint\raggedcenter@#1\endgraf}}
+%
+%      Since \address can be used any number of times, we have to
+%      store the different addresses in control sequences that we
+%      manufacture as needed. We use \addresscount@ to store the
+%      number of times \address is used.
+%
+\newcount\addresscount@
+\addresscount@\z@
+\def\addressfont@{\eightpoint}
+\def\address#1\endaddress{\global\advance\addresscount@\@ne
+%      The first address is `\address1', the next is `\address2', etc.
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname address\number\addresscount@\endcsname
+%      The unusually large shrinkability in the vskip before the
+%      address is there because we don't want the addresses to fall on
+%      a separate page at the end of a paper, and extra shrinkability
+%      may help them to fit on the previous page in borderline cases.
+  {\nobreak\vskip12\p@ minus6\p@\indent\addressfont@\smc#1\par}}
+%
+%      \curraddr was added in version 2.1.  It uses the address count
+%      without advancing it, to add to the most recent address macro.
+%      Ignore empty element; all optional elements are ignored if empty.
+%
+\def\curraddr{\let\savedef@\curraddr
+  \def\curraddr##1\endcurraddr{\let\curraddr\savedef@
+    \if\notempty{##1}%
+      \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+        \csname address\number\addresscount@\endcsname}%
+      \toks@@{##1}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname address\number\addresscount@\endcsname
+        {\the\toks@\endgraf\noexpand\nobreak
+          \indent\noexpand\addressfont@{\noexpand\rm
+          \frills@{{\noexpand\it Current address\noexpand\/}:\space}%
+          \def\noexpand\usualspace{\space}\the\toks@@\unskip}}%
+    \fi}%
+  \nofrillscheck\curraddr}
+%
+%      \email uses the same counter as \address, since they should
+%      pair up.
+%
+%    Email patch to get tt font
+\def\email{\let\savedef@\email
+  \def\email##1\endemail{\let\email\savedef@
+    \if\notempty{##1}%
+      \toks@{\def\usualspace{{\it\enspace}}\endgraf\indent\addressfont@}%
+      \toks@@{{\tt##1}\par}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname email\number\addresscount@\endcsname
+      {\the\toks@\frills@{{\noexpand\it E-mail address\noexpand\/}:%
+        \noexpand\enspace}\the\toks@@}%
+    \fi}%
+  \nofrillscheck\email}
+%
+%    \urladdr the same as \email, with the addition that \tildechar
+%    is provided for printing this character in a URL.
+\def\tildechar{{\tt\char`\~}}
+\def\urladdr{\let\savedef@\urladdr
+  \def\urladdr##1\endurladdr{\let\urladdr\savedef@
+    \if\notempty{##1}%
+      \toks@{\def\usualspace{{\it\enspace}}\endgraf\indent\eightpoint}%
+      \toks@@{\tt##1\par}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname urladdr\number\addresscount@\endcsname
+      {\the\toks@\frills@{{\noexpand\it URL\noexpand\/}:%
+        \noexpand\enspace}\the\toks@@}%
+    \fi}%
+  \nofrillscheck\urladdr}
+%
+\def\thedate@{}
+\def\date#1\enddate{\gdef\thedate@{\tenpoint#1\unskip}}
+%
+\def\thethanks@{}
+\def\thanks#1\endthanks{%
+  \if\notempty{#1}%
+    \ifx\thethanks@\empty@ \gdef\thethanks@{\eightpoint#1}%
+    \else
+      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\thethanks@\expandafter{%
+       \thethanks@\endgraf#1}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+%
+\def\thekeywords@{}
+\def\keywords{\let\savedef@\keywords
+  \def\keywords##1\endkeywords{\let\keywords\savedef@
+    \if\notempty{##1}%
+      \toks@{\def\usualspace{{\it\enspace}}\eightpoint}%
+      \toks@@{##1\unskip.}%
+      \edef\thekeywords@{\the\toks@\frills@{{\noexpand\it
+        Key words and phrases.\noexpand\enspace}}\the\toks@@}%
+    \fi}%
+  \nofrillscheck\keywords}
+%
+%      \subjclass is analogous to \keywords.  We also need a year; only
+%      certain years are valid, so we check and report an error if an
+%      invalid year is entered.  Default to 1991, so that archived
+%      material will be processed correctly.
+%      We should also check in case a LaTeX-style year change, [...], is
+%      entered and report an error for that as well; however, that is
+%      more complicated, and not implemented in this round. [2001/02/28]
+%
+\def\xci@{1991}
+\def\mm@{2000}
+\def\subjclassyear#1{%
+   \def\subjyear@{#1}%
+   \ifx\subjyear@\mm@
+   \else \ifx\subjyear@\xci@
+   \else \message{AmS-TeX warning: Unknown edition (#1) of
+       Mathematics Subject Classification; using 1991 edition}%
+     \def\subjyear@{1991}%
+   \fi\fi}
+\subjclassyear{1991}
+\def\thesubjclass@{}
+\def\subjclass{\let\savedef@\subjclass
+ \def\subjclass##1\endsubjclass{\let\subjclass\savedef@
+   \toks@{\def\usualspace{{\rm\enspace}}\eightpoint}%
+   \toks@@{##1\unskip.}%
+   \edef\thesubjclass@{\the\toks@
+     \frills@{{\noexpand\rm\noexpand\subjyear@\noexpand\space
+       {\noexpand\it Mathematics Subject Classification}.\noexpand\enspace}}%
+     \the\toks@@}}%
+  \nofrillscheck\subjclass}
+%
+%      Put the abstract in a box with margins at each side equal to
+%      \indenti, obtained by reducing \hsize within a vbox centered by
+%      $$...$$.  Notice that the \noindent is not erased by \nofrills
+%      and that's what we want.
+%
+\newbox\abstractbox@
+\def\abstract{\let\savedef@\abstract
+  \def\abstract{\let\abstract\savedef@
+    \setbox\abstractbox@\vbox\bgroup\noindent$$\vbox\bgroup
+      \def\envir@end{\endabstract}\advance\hsize-2\indenti
+      \def\usualspace{\enspace}\eightpoint \noindent
+      \frills@{{\smc Abstract.\enspace}}}%
+  \nofrillscheck\abstract}
+%
+%      Finish the box.  The \unskip is here in case the abstract ends
+%      with something that adds vertical space, such as a \proclaim.
+%
+\def\endabstract{\par\unskip\egroup$$\egroup}
+%
+%      \widestnumber used to reset hanging indention in a table of
+%      contents or bibliography.  Other applications may also be added
+%      later.
+%
+%      The outerness of the heading macros causes problems. Therefore
+%      we process \widestnumber in two stages: first, inside a group,
+%      removing the outerness by letting the macros = \relax.  Then,
+%      using an \expandafter\endgroup trick, we read the arguments
+%      while the macros are still nonouter, but process the arguments
+%      after we have exited from the group.
+%
+%      Now that \no is deprecated, provide for the possibility that
+%      \refstyle C has been set before testing for \widestnumber,
+%      and if so, don't reset it.  [bnb, 1996/12/22]
+%
+\def\widestnumber{\begingroup \let\head\relax\let\subhead\relax
+  \let\subsubhead\relax \expandafter\endgroup\setwidest@}
+%
+\def\setwidest@#1#2{%
+   \ifx#1\head\setbox\tocheadbox@\hbox{#2.\enspace}%
+   \else\ifx#1\subhead\setbox\tocsubheadbox@\hbox{#2.\enspace}%
+   \else\ifx#1\subsubhead\setbox\tocsubheadbox@\hbox{#2.\enspace}%
+   \else\ifx#1\key
+       \if C\refstyle@ \else\refstyle A\fi
+       \setboxz@h{\refsfont@\keyformat{#2}}%
+       \refindentwd\wd\z@
+   \else\ifx#1\no\refstyle C%
+       \setboxz@h{\refsfont@\keyformat{#2}}%
+       \refindentwd\wd\z@
+   \else\ifx#1\page\setbox\z@\hbox{\quad\bf#2}%
+       \pagenumwd\wd\z@
+%      We assume the default form for \item numbers rather than trying
+%      to handle all the variations such as "..."
+   \else\ifx#1\item
+       \setboxz@h{(#2)}\rosteritemwd\wdz@
+   \else\message{\string\widestnumber\space not defined for this
+      option (\string#1)}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+%
+%      \Monograph is capitalized by analogy with \NoRunningHeads and
+%      \UseAMSsymbols because of its global scope.  We don't use
+%      \global's because if the user puts \Monograph in the preamble
+%      area as instructed it will automatically have global effect,
+%      and in some special applications (e.g. documentation) it may be
+%      nice to be able to localize the effect. \Monograph changes
+%      paragraph indention from none to normal for certain structures
+%      (subhead, proclaim, definition, ...) via \varindent@; it also
+%      changes fonts for \head, \proclaim, \definition, \example,
+%      \demo, and \remark.
+%
+%      The \ifmonograph@ test is used to decide whether to save a \toc
+%      in a box or typeset it immediately, as well as whether to
+%      typeset \thanks, \subjclass, and \keywords footnotes .
+%
+\newif\ifmonograph@
+%
+\def\Monograph{\monograph@true \let\headmark\rightheadtext
+  \let\varindent@\indent \def\headfont@{\bf}\def\proclaimheadfont@{\smc}%
+  \def\remarkheadfont@{\smc}}
+%
+\let\varindent@\noindent
+%
+\newbox\tocheadbox@    \newbox\tocsubheadbox@
+\newbox\tocbox@
+%
+%      Allocate a dimen register for the width of the page number
+%      column in table of contents. The true value of \pagenumwd
+%    is not assigned until \toc is actually called, to avoid
+%    initialization complications.
+\newdimen\pagenumwd
+%
+\def\toc{\toc@{Contents}}
+%
+%      We make a separate macro that just redefines \title, \chapter,
+%      \specialhead, \head, \subhead, \subsubhead, to simplify the
+%      code of \toc.  This also makes it a little easier to work
+%      around the outerness that most of them have.
+%
+\def\newtocdefs{%
+%      The space after "\def" in these redefinitions is a convenience
+%      for someone who wants to look for the main definitions---if
+%      they search for "\def\title" the search will pass over "\def
+%      \title" and find the main definition further down.
+   \def \title##1\endtitle
+       {\penaltyandskip@\z@\smallskipamount
+        \hangindent\wd\tocheadbox@\noindent{\bf##1}}%
+   \def \chapter##1{%
+        Chapter \uppercase\expandafter{%
+              \romannumeral##1.\unskip}\enspace}%
+   \def \specialhead##1\endspecialhead
+       {\par\hangindent\wd\tocheadbox@ \noindent##1\par}%
+   \def \head##1 ##2\endhead
+       {\par\hangindent\wd\tocheadbox@ \noindent
+        \if\notempty{##1}\hbox to\wd\tocheadbox@{\hfil##1\enspace}\fi
+        ##2\par}%
+%      Since \subhead and \subsubhead change the \leftskip, we need to
+%      do a \par before closing the group that localizes the change.
+%      Unlike \head, we do not try to right-align the numbers.
+%
+   \def \subhead##1 ##2\endsubhead
+       {\par\vskip-\parskip {\normalbaselines
+        \advance\leftskip\wd\tocheadbox@
+        \hangindent\wd\tocsubheadbox@ \noindent
+        \if\notempty{##1}%
+              \hbox to\wd\tocsubheadbox@{##1\unskip\hfil}\fi
+         ##2\par}}%
+   \def \subsubhead##1 ##2\endsubsubhead
+       {\par\vskip-\parskip {\normalbaselines
+        \advance\leftskip\wd\tocheadbox@
+        \hangindent\wd\tocsubheadbox@ \noindent
+        \if\notempty{##1}%
+              \hbox to\wd\tocsubheadbox@{##1\unskip\hfil}\fi
+        ##2\par}}}
+%
+\def\toc@#1{\relaxnext@
+ \DN@{\ifx\next\nofrills\DN@\nofrills{\nextii@}%
+      \else\DN@{\nextii@{{#1}}}\fi
+      \next@}%
+ \DNii@##1{%
+%      If we're doing a book table of contents, we avoid setting the
+%      whole thing in a box because if it's several pages long we
+%      might run out of memory.
+\ifmonograph@\bgroup\else\setbox\tocbox@\vbox\bgroup
+   \centerline{\headfont@\ignorespaces##1\unskip}\nobreak
+   \vskip\belowheadskip \fi
+%    Redefine \page (it has another definition normally, for use in
+%    references). The \hfilneg at the end is to cancel the
+%    \parfillskip; the \penalty is to keep the \hfilneg from being
+%    removed (normal processing at the end of a paragraph removes the
+%    last skip).
+   \def\page####1%
+       {\unskip\penalty\z@\null\hfil
+        \rlap{\hbox to\pagenumwd{\quad\hfil####1}}%
+              \hfilneg\penalty\@M}%
+   \setbox\tocheadbox@\hbox{0.\enspace}%
+   \setbox\tocsubheadbox@\hbox{0.0.\enspace}%
+   \leftskip\indenti \rightskip\leftskip
+%      Increase \rightskip to move in the right margin to leave room
+%      for page numbers (which will hang over into the "right margin").
+%      The \bf is for taking into account page numbers for chapter titles,
+%      which are bold.  A little extra width shouldn't hurt for toc's
+%      without chapter titles.
+   \setboxz@h{\bf\quad000}\pagenumwd\wd\z@
+   \advance\rightskip\pagenumwd
+%      Redefine all the heading macros to be their table-of-contents
+%      versions.
+   \newtocdefs
+ }%
+ \FN@\next@}
+%
+%      The \egroup closes the \vbox; or if we're in a monograph, just
+%      matches the beginning \bgroup.
+%
+\def\endtoc{\par\egroup}
+%
+%      \pretitle, ..., \prepaper are entry points between the other
+%      parts of the \topmatter so that users can insert things if
+%      necessary.  If \pretitle is used to put any kind of box on the
+%      page, it will throw off the sinkage of the title and everything
+%      will have to be recalculated.
+%
+\let\pretitle\relax
+\let\preauthor\relax
+\let\preaffil\relax
+\let\predate\relax
+\let\preabstract\relax
+\let\prepaper\relax
+%
+%      Now \dedicatory shows how to make use of the \pre... entry
+%      points defined above.
+%
+\def\dedicatory #1\enddedicatory{\def\preabstract{{\medskip
+  \eightpoint\it \raggedcenter@#1\endgraf}}}
+%
+%      A hook is provided for a translator name, for translations.
+%      \eightpoint is used instead of just \eightrm, to be on the safe
+%      side.  For instance, in transliteration some Russian names have
+%      a ``prime'' symbol to represent the Russian ``soft sign''.  If
+%      we didn't use \eightpoint we'd get a 10-point prime symbol.
+%
+\def\thetranslator@{}
+\def\translator{%
+  \let\savedef@\translator
+  \def\translator##1\endtranslator{\let\translator\savedef@
+    \edef\thetranslator@{\noexpand\nobreak\noexpand\medskip
+      \noexpand\line{\noexpand\eightpoint\hfil
+      \frills@{Translated by \uppercase}{##1}\qquad\qquad}%
+       \noexpand\nobreak}}%
+  \nofrillscheck\translator}
+%
+%      \endtopmatter now puts all of these things together on the
+%      page. We start by checking to see if the left-hand running head
+%      has been defined; if not, presumably it's because \author has
+%      not been used, and presumably that means we are in a book
+%      chapter rather than in an article. So we define it to be the
+%      same as the right-hand running head, which will usually be the
+%      text of the title.
+%
+%      When doing chapters in a book, \subjclass, \keywords and
+%      \thanks should not print at the bottom of the page.
+%
+%      The baseline of the title should always fall at a fixed
+%      distance from the top of the page, so we do the spacing with
+%      \topskip instead of \vskip.
+%
+%      The spacing between elements of the topmatter in AMSPPT is
+%      intended to be the same as in the Journal of the AMS; however
+%      the actual spacing currently used in the latter is the rather
+%      idiosyncratic result of a couple of years of piecemeal changes,
+%      so that rather than follow it blindly we have opted to come as
+%      close as possible by choosing whole or half-pica amounts.  The
+%      situation is further complicated by the fact that the
+%      documentstyle for the Journal of the AMS uses a different
+%      method for putting running heads on the page, so that we cannot
+%      measure distance from the top of the page in the same way; and
+%      the date, affiliation, and abstract are handled differently as
+%      well.
+%
+%      In this diagram the first measurement is from the top of the
+%      type block to the baseline of the first line of the title.  In
+%      the Journal of the AMS the value is 5.5pc rather than 4pc,
+%      because it's measured to the top of the running head (which
+%      extends above the text block). The rest of the measurements are
+%      approximate visual space, done in \endtopmatter by \vskip's;
+%      the effective base-to-base distance is approximately half a
+%      pica more than the amount of the \vskip.
+%
+%      ______________________________ top of type area
+%        |                            (according to \pageheight)
+%        | 4pc baselineskip
+%        |   |----------------------|
+%      __|___|_______ TITLE ________|__
+%            | WHICH MAY BE SEVERAL |
+%            |      LINES LONG      |
+%            |----------------------|
+%                      2.5pc
+%                   |--------|
+%                   | AUTHOR |
+%                   |--------|
+%                       1pc
+%                   |--------|
+%                   | AFFIL  |
+%                   |--------|
+%                       1pc
+%                    |------|
+%                    | DATE |
+%                    |------|
+%                       1pc
+%                 |------------|
+%                 | DEDICATORY |
+%                 |------------|
+%                      1.5pc
+%        |------------------------------|
+%        |           ABSTRACT           |
+%        |------------------------------|
+%                      1.5pc
+%        |------------------------------|
+%        |       TABLE OF CONTENTS      |
+%        |------------------------------|
+%                       2pc
+%      |-----------------------------------|
+%      |           START OF TEXT           |
+%      |                                   |
+%
+%
+%      Make this \outer to catch missing or misspelled \end... in the
+%      topmatter.  It doesn't work with \abstract though because that
+%      uses the \setbox\vbox\bgroup ... \egroup mechanism, so we use
+%      \add@missing to catch missing \endabstract's.
+%
+\outer\def\endtopmatter{\add@missing\endabstract
+  \edef\next{\the\leftheadtoks}%
+  \ifx\next\empty@
+    \expandafter\leftheadtext\expandafter{\the\rightheadtoks}%
+  \fi
+  \ifmonograph@\else
+    \ifx\thesubjclass@\empty@\else \makefootnote@{}{\thesubjclass@}\fi
+    \ifx\thekeywords@\empty@\else \makefootnote@{}{\thekeywords@}\fi
+%      If \thanks given, treat it as a footnote text (with no footnote
+%      mark).
+    \ifx\thethanks@\empty@\else \makefootnote@{}{\thethanks@}\fi
+  \fi
+  \inslogo@
+%      We want a sinkage of 4pc from the top of the page (= the top of
+%      the text area, not including the running heads) for articles,
+%      and 7pc for monograph chapters.
+  \pretitle
+  \begingroup % to localize variant topskip
+  \ifmonograph@ \topskip7pc \else \topskip4pc \fi
+%      We don't unvbox the titlebox because we don't expect footnotes
+%      to ever appear in the title, so we don't need to worry about
+%      allowing them to migrate to the outer level.  (Some journals
+%      use footnotes in titles to give acknowledgments of research
+%      support; in AMSPPT this is an unnumbered footnote, done with
+%      \thanks, outside of the title.)
+  \box\titlebox@
+  \endgroup
+  \preauthor
+  \ifvoid\authorbox@\else \vskip2.5pcplus1pc\unvbox\authorbox@\fi
+  \preaffil
+  \ifvoid\affilbox@\else \vskip1pcplus.5pc\unvbox\affilbox@\fi
+  \predate
+  \ifx\thedate@\empty@\else
+    \vskip1pcplus.5pc\line{\hfil\thedate@\hfil}\fi
+  \preabstract
+  \ifvoid\abstractbox@\else
+    \vskip1.5pcplus.5pc\unvbox\abstractbox@ \fi
+  \ifvoid\tocbox@\else\vskip1.5pcplus.5pc\unvbox\tocbox@\fi
+  \prepaper
+  \vskip2pcplus1pc\relax
+}
+%
+\newif\ifdocument@  \document@false
+\def\document{\document@true
+%    We call \loadextrafonts@ here as well as in \topmatter; this is
+%    to allow use of the extra sizes of the fonts in e.g. test documents
+%    that don't include a full topmatter section. If \topmatter was
+%    executed, \loadextrafonts@ will now be a harmless no-op.
+  \loadextrafonts@
+  \let\fontlist@\relax\let\alloclist@\relax
+%      Start out in \tenpoint
+  \tenpoint}
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -6- SECTION HEADINGS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{section heads,}
+%      In accordance with conventional design principles, the space
+%      below headings is not given any stretchability or
+%      shrinkability.
+%
+\newskip\aboveheadskip       \aboveheadskip\bigskipamount
+\newdimen\belowheadskip      \belowheadskip6\p@
+\def\headfont@{\smc}
+%
+%      Since we often want to do a penalty and vskip, and since there
+%      are extra complications involved if there is a preceding vskip
+%      from something else, we define a macro to do it.  Normally it
+%      is used while we're working on the main vertical list, so we
+%      have to use \removelastskip (which does a negative skip) rather
+%      than \unskip (which REALLY removes the last skip).  If the last
+%      thing on the main vertical list is anything other than a vskip,
+%      say a penalty from \pagebreak, the value returned by \lastskip
+%      will be 0, but the potential complications are a whole other
+%      subject.  This macro handles the straightforward cases.
+%
+%      In some cases we may not want to put a penalty at all.
+%      We refrain from doing any penalty if the first argument of
+%      \penaltyandskip@ is 0; the essential effect of an explicit
+%      \penalty0 can be gotten by doing a penalty of 1 instead.
+%
+%      We use \penalty@ instead of \penalty, so that we can redefine
+%      \penalty@ in \nobreak, to prevent page breaks between certain
+%      pairs such as \head \subhead or \head \proclaim or \nopagebreak
+%      \proclaim ---for example, in
+%
+%      "... which leads to this theorem:
+%      \proclaim{Theorem 8.2} ..."
+%
+%      a page break after the colon would be bad, and a user might
+%      want to be able to add a \nopagebreak.
+%
+%      The sequence
+%
+%           \subhead Text...\endsubhead
+%           \subsubhead Text...\endsubsubhead
+%
+%      will still have the weakness of allowing a pagebreak between
+%      the two headings, because \endsubhead doesn't do a \nobreak
+%      (since it's a run-in heading.
+%
+\def\penaltyandskip@#1#2{\par\skip@#2\relax
+  \ifdim\lastskip<\skip@\relax\removelastskip
+      \ifnum#1=\z@\else\penalty@#1\relax\fi\vskip\skip@
+  \else\ifnum#1=\z@\else\penalty@#1\relax\fi\fi}
+%
+%      The above code contains a bug: if \lastskip=\skip@ (as it does
+%      between two adjacent theorems), and this point coincides with
+%      a page break, the \lastskip will remain at the bottom of the
+%      page.  This could be corrected by reformulating the code, but
+%      page breaks would change; therefore, no change has been made,
+%      for reasons of backward compatibility.  However, the following
+%      code would `do the right thing':
+%
+%  \def\penaltyandskip@#1#2{\par\skip@#2\relax
+%    \ifdim\lastskip>\skip@
+%      \ifnum#1=\z@\else\penalty@#1\relax\fi
+%    \else\relax\removelastskip
+%      \ifnum#1=\z@\else\penalty@#1\relax\fi\vskip\skip@
+%    \fi}
+%
+%      When a page ends with space from \lastskip, inserting \pagebreak
+%      at the end of the text of the last element (before \end...) will
+%      remove the space; \removelastskip before the beginning of the
+%      next element has no lasting effect, as it inserts a negative skip
+%      that is smaller than the new skip applied with \penaltyandskip@,
+%      and is therefore removed.
+%
+\def\nobreak{\penalty\@M
+%      Change the definition of \penalty@ so that the following number
+%      will be gobbled (by assigning it to the scratch register
+%      \count@@@).
+  \ifvmode\gdef\penalty@{\global\let\penalty@\penalty\count@@@}%
+%      If the next piece of the document after \nobreak is something
+%      like \subhead or \proclaim that calls \penaltyandskip@, then
+%      \penalty@ will reset itself in the way that we want.  But if
+%      not, then we still want to reset \penalty@; so we use
+%      \everypar.  There are probably some unusual cases that will
+%      still have problems, but at the moment this is the best
+%      solution we have.
+  \everypar{\global\let\penalty@\penalty\everypar{}}\fi}
+%
+\let\penalty@\penalty
+%
+%      We equate the old form of the headings to the new form, for
+%      backward compatibility.  It's easier to do this now rather than
+%      later because \head and \subhead are going to be outer.
+%
+\def\heading#1\endheading{\head#1\endhead}
+\def\subheading{\DN@{\ifx\next\nofrills
+    \expandafter\subheading@
+  \else \expandafter\subheading@\expandafter\empty@
+  \fi}%
+  \FN@\next@
+}
+\def\subheading@#1#2{\subhead#1#2\endsubhead}
+%
+%      One more heading level, for occasional use.  This is the next
+%      level ABOVE \head.  The default style is ragged right;
+%      otherwise it's the same as \head.
+%
+\newskip\abovespecialheadskip
+\abovespecialheadskip=\aboveheadskip
+\def\specialheadfont@{\bf}
+\outer\def\specialhead{%
+  \add@missing\endroster \add@missing\enddefinition
+  \add@missing\enddemo \add@missing\endexample
+  \add@missing\endproclaim
+  \penaltyandskip@{-200}\abovespecialheadskip
+  \begingroup\interlinepenalty\@M\rightskip\z@ plus\hsize
+  \let\\\linebreak
+  \specialheadfont@\noindent}
+\def\endspecialhead{\par\endgroup\nobreak\vskip\belowheadskip}
+%
+%      penalty-200 is the penalty amount used by plain.tex's
+%      \bigbreak.
+%
+\outer\def\head#1\endhead{%
+  \add@missing\endroster \add@missing\enddefinition
+  \add@missing\enddemo \add@missing\endexample
+  \add@missing\endproclaim
+  \penaltyandskip@{-200}\aboveheadskip
+  {\headfont@\raggedcenter@\interlinepenalty\@M
+  #1\endgraf}\headmark{#1}%
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip\belowheadskip}
+%
+%      \headmark will be redefined to be \rightheadtext by \Monograph.
+%
+\let\headmark\eat@
+%
+%      The purpose of \restoredef@ is to work around problems caused
+%      by the outerness of things like \subhead. \relax at the
+%      beginning prevents the \savedef@ (which may be \outer) from
+%      being read prematurely in certain kinds of expansion.
+%
+\def\restoredef@#1{\relax\let#1\savedef@\let\savedef@\relax}
+%
+%      \subhead and \subsubhead are simpler, though they allow
+%      \nofrills. (\head, being centered, does not have automatic
+%      punctuation put in at the end and so \nofrills doesn't have
+%      anything to do.) The syntax of \subhead is changed from
+%      \subheading{...} (version 1) to \subhead...\endsubhead (version
+%      2). This was done for the following reasons: (1) to be
+%      consistent with \head...\endhead (we could have changed \head
+%      instead of \subhead, but the \x...\endx syntax is the one
+%      currently in  use in AMS production); (2) if someone (perhaps
+%      us) ever wants to do something tricky with the headings, having
+%      the \end... may help them avoid technical complications.
+%
+\newskip\subheadskip       \subheadskip\medskipamount
+\def\subheadfont@{\bf}
+\outer\def\subhead{%
+  \add@missing\endroster \add@missing\enddefinition
+  \add@missing\enddemo \add@missing\endexample
+  \add@missing\endproclaim
+  \let\savedef@\subhead \let\subhead\relax
+  \def\subhead##1\endsubhead{\restoredef@\subhead
+    \penaltyandskip@{-100}\subheadskip
+%      Add italic correction in \usualspace, because \subheadfont@ is
+%      italic, in case the substituted punctuation is something tall
+%      like a question mark or exclamation point.
+    {\def\usualspace{\/{\subheadfont@\enspace}}%
+     \varindent@\subheadfont@\ignorespaces##1\unskip\frills@{.\enspace}}%
+    \ignorespaces}%
+  \nofrillscheck\subhead}
+%
+%      In version 2.0 of amsppt.sty we also add a third level of
+%      heading, \subsubhead.
+%
+\newskip\subsubheadskip       \subsubheadskip\medskipamount
+\def\subsubheadfont@{\it}
+\outer\def\subsubhead{%
+  \add@missing\endroster \add@missing\enddefinition
+  \add@missing\enddemo
+  \add@missing\endexample \add@missing\endproclaim
+  \let\savedef@\subsubhead \let\subsubhead\relax
+  \def\subsubhead##1\endsubsubhead{\restoredef@\subsubhead
+    \penaltyandskip@{-50}\subsubheadskip
+%      Add italic correction in \usualspace, because \subsubheadfont@
+%      is italic, in case the substituted punctuation is something tall
+%      like a question mark or exclamation point.
+    {\def\usualspace{\/{\subsubheadfont@\enspace}}%
+     \subsubheadfont@##1\unskip\frills@{.\enspace}}\ignorespaces}%
+  \nofrillscheck\subsubhead}
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -7- THEOREM ENVIRONMENTS AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{theorems/proofs/definitions/remarks,}
+%
+\def\proclaimheadfont@{\bf}
+%      Make \proclaimfont a non-private control sequence, so that
+%      users can change it back to \sl if desired without
+%      complications.
+\def\proclaimfont{\it}
+%
+\newskip\preproclaimskip  \preproclaimskip=\medskipamount
+\newskip\postproclaimskip \postproclaimskip=\medskipamount
+\outer\def\proclaim{%
+  \let\savedef@\proclaim \let\proclaim\relax
+  \add@missing\endroster \add@missing\enddefinition
+  \add@missing\endproclaim \envir@stack\endproclaim
+%      penalty-100 is the penalty amount used by plain.tex's
+%      \medbreak.
+  \def\proclaim##1{\restoredef@\proclaim
+    \penaltyandskip@{-100}\preproclaimskip
+    {\def\usualspace{\/{\proclaimheadfont@\enspace}}%
+     \varindent@\proclaimheadfont@\ignorespaces##1\unskip
+     \frills@{.\enspace}}%
+    \proclaimfont\ignorespaces}%
+  \nofrillscheck\proclaim}
+%
+%      \endproclaim ends the paragraph, switches back to \rm and adds
+%      spacing. (This means that if, for some strange reason, a whole
+%      section of text happens to be in italics, then the user must
+%      type \it again after each \endproclaim, but that seems too
+%      special a case to need providing for.)  Version 2.1 change:
+%      removed \outer prefix, to simplify some programming related
+%      to \add@missing and \revert@envir.
+%
+\def\endproclaim{\revert@envir\endproclaim \par\rm
+  \vskip\postproclaimskip}
+%
+%      In \remark, we take the opportunity again to issue an error
+%      message if a previous \proclaim has no matching \endproclaim.
+%
+\def\remarkheadfont@{\it}
+\def\remarkfont{\rm}
+\newskip\remarkskip  \remarkskip=\medskipamount
+\def\remark{\let\savedef@\remark \let\remark\relax
+  \add@missing\endroster \add@missing\endproclaim
+  \envir@stack\endremark
+  \def\remark##1{\restoredef@\remark
+    \penaltyandskip@\z@\remarkskip
+    {\def\usualspace{\/{\remarkheadfont@\enspace}}%
+     \varindent@\remarkheadfont@\ignorespaces##1\unskip
+     \frills@{.\enspace}}%
+    \remarkfont\ignorespaces}%
+  \nofrillscheck\remark}
+%
+%      \endremark is easy.
+%
+\def\endremark{\par\revert@envir\endremark}
+%
+%    Assumption: \square is defined in initialization (normally via
+%    \UseAMSsymbols).
+\def\qed{\ifhmode\unskip\nobreak\fi\quad
+  \ifmmode\square\else$\m@th\square$\fi}
+%
+%      Proofs are the same as Remarks, except there is an additional
+%      \medskip after a Proof.  We don't have a runaway demo or remark
+%      check until \enddocument because proofs within proofs (and
+%      perhaps remarks within remarks) are possible.
+%
+\newskip\postdemoskip  \postdemoskip=\medskipamount
+%    Ensure that there is no lingering indication of a manual end-of-proof box.
+\newif\if@qedhere
+\def\demo{%
+  \@qedherefalse
+  \DN@{\ifx\next\nofrills
+    \DN@####1####2{\remark####1{####2}\envir@stack\enddemo
+      \ignorespaces}%
+  \else
+    \DN@####1{\remark{####1}\envir@stack\enddemo\ignorespaces}%
+  \fi
+  \next@}%
+\FN@\next@}
+%
+\def\enddemo{\par\revert@envir\enddemo \endremark\vskip\postdemoskip}
+%
+%      \definition uses \proclaimheadfont@ because normally the two
+%      use the same font for the head font, with \definition using \rm
+%      for the text as opposed to the \it used for \proclaim.
+%
+\def\definitionfont{\rm}
+\newskip\predefinitionskip  \predefinitionskip=\medskipamount
+\newskip\postdefinitionskip  \postdefinitionskip=\medskipamount
+\def\definition{\let\savedef@\definition \let\definition\relax
+  \add@missing\endproclaim \add@missing\endroster
+  \add@missing\enddefinition \envir@stack\enddefinition
+%      \proclaimheadfont@ comes after the period here because
+%      sometimes we want the period to be roman rather than bold, e.g.
+%      when the preceding thing is a math formula or a citation, set
+%      in roman type.
+  \def\definition##1{\restoredef@\definition
+    \penaltyandskip@{-100}\predefinitionskip
+    {\def\usualspace{\/{\proclaimheadfont@\enspace}}%
+     \varindent@\proclaimheadfont@\ignorespaces##1\unskip
+     \frills@{.\proclaimheadfont@\enspace}}%
+    \definitionfont\ignorespaces}%
+  \nofrillscheck\definition}
+\def\enddefinition{\revert@envir\enddefinition
+  \par\vskip\postdefinitionskip}
+%
+\def\example{%
+  \DN@{\ifx\next\nofrills
+    \DN@####1####2{\definition####1{####2}\envir@stack\endexample
+      \ignorespaces}%
+  \else
+    \DN@####1{\definition{####1}\envir@stack\endexample\ignorespaces}%
+  \fi
+  \next@}%
+\FN@\next@}
+\def\endexample{\revert@envir\endexample \enddefinition }
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -8- ROSTERS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{rosters,}
+%      In version 2 of amsppt we provide a more convenient way of
+%      changing the indention of roster items.
+%
+\newdimen\rosteritemwd
+\rosteritemwd16pt % approximately the width of (iii) in 10 point text
+%
+%      \roster uses \rostercount@ to store the \item number. The first
+%      item is treated specially, because of the extra space before
+%      it, so we need a flag \iffirstitem@ to identify it.
+%
+\newcount\rostercount@
+\newif\iffirstitem@
+%
+%      Since \item in \roster differs from in \plain, we store plain's
+%      \item in \plainitem@, so that we can restore the definition
+%      after the \roster is over.
+%
+\let\plainitem@\item
+%
+%      In order for our \roster's to work, we will also have to be
+%      sure that \everypar is {}.  Just in case \everypar already has
+%      a value, as it might in some format, we store those values in
+%      the token list \everypartoks@, so that we can restore them at
+%      the end.  \par@ does this storing, and sets \everypar{}.
+%
+\newtoks\everypartoks@
+\def\par@{\everypartoks@\expandafter{\the\everypar}\everypar{}}
+%
+\def\leftskip@{}
+%
+\def\roster{%
+  \envir@stack\endroster
+%      We also have to store the \leftskip, since it will be changed.
+  \edef\leftskip@{\leftskip\the\leftskip}%
+  \relaxnext@
+  \rostercount@\z@% Initialize \rostercount@ to 0.
+  \def\item{\FN@\rosteritem@}%      \item, now redefined, has
+%      to look ahead for [ and ", since we allow optional and literal
+%      arguments. \rosteritem@ itself is defined below.  The following
+%      \next@ (in \DN@) is the one called at the very end of this
+%      \def.
+  \DN@{\ifx\next\runinitem\let\next@\nextii@
+    \else\let\next@\nextiii@
+    \fi\next@}%
+%      First we look to see whether \roster is followed by \runinitem,
+%      since this requires different processing.
+  \DNii@\runinitem% If \runinitem occurs, \nextii@ must kill it off.
+    {\unskip% This unskips any space before the original \roster.
+%      Our definition of \nextii@\runinitem itself uses compressed
+%      format and a \futurelet\next\next@, because we still have to
+%      allow [ or " to come next.
+     \DN@{\ifx\next[\let\next@\nextii@
+       \else\ifx\next"\let\next@\nextiii@\else\let\next@\nextiv@\fi
+       \fi\next@}%
+%      The following \nextii@ is the one created by
+%      \nextii@\runinitem; there is no conflict of names, since the
+%      first calls the second.
+     \DNii@[####1]{\rostercount@####1\relax
+       \enspace\therosteritem{\number\rostercount@}~\ignorespaces}%
+%      If [...] comes next, we use (...) but we explicitly do this by
+%      setting \rostercount@ equal to ... so that succeeding \item's
+%      will have the right numbers (use of something other than a
+%      number will give an error message).
+     \def\nextiii@"####1"{\enspace{\rm####1}~\ignorespaces}%
+%      If "..." comes next, we use ... exactly as typed.
+     \def\nextiv@{\enspace\therosteritem1\rostercount@\@ne~}%
+%      Otherwise just use (1).
+     \par@\firstitem@false% Before doing any of this we still change
+%      \everypar, if necessary, which is normally done elsewhere, and
+%      set \firstitem@false, since this \runinitem counts as the
+%      first.
+     \FN@\next@}%      End of definition of \nextii@\runinitem.
+%      The following \nextiii@ will be used if we didn't have
+%      \runinitem.
+  \def\nextiii@{\par\par@% End the present paragraph, change \everypar
+%      if necessary, prohibit a break, add a small skip, but add
+%      something to offset any \parskip, if there is any, which would
+%      be contributed when the next paragraph is begun by the next
+%      \item.
+    \penalty\@m\smallskip\vskip-\parskip
+%      And set \firstitem@true for use with \item.
+    \firstitem@true}%
+  \FN@\next@}
+%
+%      Remember that \rosteritem@ is called by
+%      \futurelet\next\rosteritem@.
+%
+\def\rosteritem@{\iffirstitem@\firstitem@false
+  \else\par\vskip-\parskip\fi
+%      Except at the first \item, we end the paragraph (consisting of
+%      the previous \item), and subtract any space that might be added
+%      by the next \item.
+ \leftskip\rosteritemwd \advance\leftskip\normalparindent
+ \advance\leftskip.5em \noindent
+ \DNii@[##1]{\rostercount@##1\relax\itembox@}%
+%      If [...] follows \item, we use ... as the number, again by
+%      setting \rostercount@, so that succeeding \items will have the
+%      right number.
+ \def\nextiii@"##1"{\def\therosteritem@{\rm##1}\itembox@}%
+%      If "..." follows  \item, we use ... exactly as typed.
+ \def\nextiv@{\advance\rostercount@\@ne\itembox@}%
+%      Otherwise we print the \rostercount@ in parentheses.
+ \def\therosteritem@{\therosteritem{\number\rostercount@}}%
+ \ifx\next[\let\next@\nextii@\else\ifx\next"\let\next@\nextiii@\else
+  \let\next@\nextiv@\fi\fi\next@}
+%
+\def\itembox@{\llap{\hbox to\rosteritemwd{\hss
+  \kern\z@ % kern to thwart \unskip in \rom
+  \therosteritem@}\enspace}\ignorespaces}
+%
+%      \therosteritem is just a convenience for the user.
+%
+\def\therosteritem#1{\rom{(\ignorespaces#1\unskip)}}
+%
+%      We want to save \Runinitem for last, but it is relevant even to
+%      the definition of \endroster, since we have to worry whether
+%      \endroster is followed by another \Runinitem.  We will use a
+%      flag \ifnextRunin@ to tell us.
+%
+\newif\ifnextRunin@
+%
+\def\endroster{\relaxnext@
+ \revert@envir\endroster % restore \envir@end
+ \par\leftskip@ % End the paragraph, and restore the \leftskip.
+ \global\rosteritemwd16\p@ % restore default value
+ \penalty-50 \vskip-\parskip\smallskip % Add a good break and
+%      subtract any space that will be started by next paragraph, but
+%      add a \smallskip.
+ \DN@{\ifx\next\Runinitem\let\next@\relax
+%      Don't do anything else if \Runinitem comes next.
+  \else\nextRunin@false\let\item\plainitem@ % Otherwise, set
+%      \nextRunin@false, and restore \item to its definition in plain;
+   \ifx\next\par % moreover, if \endroster is followed by \par,
+    \DN@\par{\everypar\expandafter{\the\everypartoks@}}%
+%      delete that instruction (since we've already put in a \par),
+%      and restore \everypar,
+   \else % but if the \endroster isn't followed by a new paragraph,
+    \DN@{\noindent\everypar\expandafter{\the\everypartoks@}}%
+%      start the next paragraph unindented, and restore \everypar.
+  \fi\fi\next@}%
+ \FN@\next@}
+%
+%      Finally, for \Runinitem ... \roster\runinitem we have the usual
+%      junk for worrying about [ or " coming next, and then more
+%      interesting things:  We have to find out how many lines of text
+%      we had before the \roster; we will store this in
+%      \rosterhangafter@.
+%
+\newcount\rosterhangafter@
+\def\Runinitem#1\roster\runinitem{\relaxnext@
+  \envir@stack\endroster
+%      Initialize \rostercount@ to 0.
+ \rostercount@\z@
+%      Define \item as before.
+ \def\item{\FN@\rosteritem@}%
+%      Store everything up to the roster in \runinitem@.
+ \def\runinitem@{#1}%
+ \DN@{\ifx\next[\let\next\nextii@\else\ifx\next"\let\next\nextiii@
+  \else\let\next\nextiv@\fi\fi\next}%
+ \DNii@[##1]{\rostercount@##1\relax
+%      If [...] follows \runinitem, we proceed as before, except we
+%      call this first instance \item@, and we let \nextv@, defined
+%      below, take care of everything.
+  \def\item@{\therosteritem{\number\rostercount@}}\nextv@}%
+%      If "..." follows \runinitem, we define \item@ to use it.
+ \def\nextiii@"##1"{\def\item@{{\rm##1}}\nextv@}%
+ \def\nextiv@{\advance\rostercount@\@ne
+%      Otherwise, we use the proper \rostercount@. Now comes \nextv@,
+%      which has to properly typeset things.
+  \def\item@{\therosteritem{\number\rostercount@}}\nextv@}%
+%      First store things in \box0 .
+ \def\nextv@{\setbox\z@\vbox
+%      Start unindented if we have \ifnextRunin@true.  This will
+%      happen only if we had \Runinitem...\endroster right before.
+  {\ifnextRunin@\noindent\fi
+%      Add the stored things in \runinitem@, and then \item@.
+  \runinitem@\unskip\enspace\item@~\par
+%      This sets \rosterhangafter@ to the number of lines in \box0 ,
+%      i.e., of the material so far; see the TeXbook, p. 103. We need
+%      to say \global since this is set  within \box0. Now we're done
+%      with \box0 !
+  \global\rosterhangafter@\prevgraf}%
+  \firstitem@false% Set \firstitem@false for future \item's.
+%      End previous paragraph unless we had \Runinitem ...\endroster
+%      right before. Now comes the good part: we
+%      \hangindent3\parindent, as before, but we do it for
+%      \rosterhangafter@ lines, the number that already appeared in
+%      the material we set in \box0 .
+  \ifnextRunin@\else\par\fi
+  \hangafter\rosterhangafter@\hangindent3\normalparindent
+%      Start unindented if we had a \Runinitem ... \endroster right
+%      before.
+  \ifnextRunin@\noindent\fi
+  \runinitem@\unskip\enspace%  Put in all the stored stuff
+  \item@~\ifnextRunin@\else\par@\fi% and the \item@, and
+%      end the paragraph, unless we had a \Runinitem ... \endroster
+%      before.
+  \nextRunin@true\ignorespaces}%% Here's where we set \nextRunin@true.
+ \FN@\next@}
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -9- FOOTNOTES
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{footnotes,}
+%      \footmarkform@ tells how to treat a general type of footnote
+%      marker.  And \thefootnotemark is for the user, analogous to
+%      \thetag in AMSTEX.TEX.
+%
+\def\footmarkform@#1{$\m@th^{#1}$}
+\let\thefootnotemark\footmarkform@
+%
+%      \makefootnote@ takes care of the general problem of creating a
+%      footnote whose marker is #1 and whose text is #2, so that we
+%      can concentrate separately on the problem of how the marker is
+%      determined.  It is essentially \vfootnote from the TeXbook, p.
+%      363, except that we don't do fancy things to worry about
+%      category code changes, and instead of adding a \strut at the
+%      end, we will just add the lower part of the strut.
+%
+\def\makefootnote@#1#2{\insert\footins
+ {\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \eightpoint\splittopskip\ht\strutbox\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+ \floatingpenalty\@MM\leftskip\z@skip\rightskip\z@skip
+ \spaceskip\z@skip\xspaceskip\z@skip
+ \leavevmode{#1}\footstrut\ignorespaces#2\unskip\lower\dp\strutbox
+ \vbox to\dp\strutbox{}}}
+%
+%      Before version 2.0 \footmarkcount@ was declared in amstex.tex.
+%
+\newcount\footmarkcount@
+\footmarkcount@\z@
+%
+%      \footnotemark basically just advances \footmarkcount@ by 1 and
+%      then uses \footmarkform@{\number\footmarkcount@}---we still
+%      have to worry about the space factor as in the definition of
+%      \footnote in the TeXbook, p. 363.  However, we are allowing
+%      both an `optional' argument [#1], where we instead use
+%      \footmarkform@{#1}, and a `literal' argument "#1", where we
+%      instead use #1 exactly as typed, so we need to use a \futurelet
+%      to look at the next symbol. Compressed format is used.
+%
+\def\footnotemark{\let\@sf\empty@\relaxnext@
+ \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+ \DN@{\ifx[\next\let\next@\nextii@\else
+  \ifx"\next\let\next@\nextiii@\else
+  \let\next@\nextiv@\fi\fi\next@}%
+ \DNii@[##1]{\footmarkform@{##1}\@sf}%
+ \def\nextiii@"##1"{{##1}\@sf}%
+ \def\nextiv@{\iffirstchoice@\global\advance\footmarkcount@\@ne\fi
+  \footmarkform@{\number\footmarkcount@}\@sf}%
+ \FN@\next@}
+%
+%      \footnotetext essentially applies \makefootnote@ to the next
+%      group, using \footmarkcount@ for the marker that goes before
+%      the footnote text. However, we once again allow optional and
+%      literal arguments.  Compressed format is used.
+%
+\def\footnotetext{\relaxnext@
+ \DN@{\ifx[\next\let\next@\nextii@\else
+  \ifx"\next\let\next@\nextiii@\else
+  \let\next@\nextiv@\fi\fi\next@}%
+ \DNii@[##1]##2{\makefootnote@{\footmarkform@{##1}}{##2}}%
+ \def\nextiii@"##1"##2{\makefootnote@{##1}{##2}}%
+ \def\nextiv@##1{\makefootnote@{\footmarkform@%
+  {\number\footmarkcount@}}{##1}}%
+ \FN@\next@}
+%
+%      Finally, \footnote is basically \footnotemark\footnote, but we
+%      can't write it directly that way because it, too, can take
+%      optional and literal arguments.  Compressed format again.
+%
+\def\footnote{\let\@sf\empty@\relaxnext@
+ \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+ \DN@{\ifx[\next\let\next@\nextii@\else
+  \ifx"\next\let\next@\nextiii@\else
+  \let\next@\nextiv@\fi\fi\next@}%
+ \DNii@[##1]##2{\footnotemark[##1]\footnotetext[##1]{##2}}%
+ \def\nextiii@"##1"##2{\footnotemark"##1"\footnotetext"##1"{##2}}%
+ \def\nextiv@##1{\footnotemark\footnotetext{##1}}%
+ \FN@\next@}
+%
+%      \adjustfootnotemark just allows the user to change
+%      \footmarkcount@.
+%
+\def\adjustfootnotemark#1{\advance\footmarkcount@#1\relax}
+%
+%      We use the definition of \footnoterule provided by plain, but
+%      change its width from 2 truein to 5pc.
+%
+\def\footnoterule{\kern-4\p@
+  \hrule width5pc\kern 3.6\p@}%      the \hrule is .4pt high
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -10- TABLES
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%      At the present time no table macros are provided.  Captions can
+%      be gotten using \topcaption or \botcaption.
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -11- FIGURE SPACES AND CAPTIONS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{figures and captions,}
+\def\captionfont@{\smc}
+%
+%      These captions are designed for use within \topinsert's and
+%      \midinsert's.  \nofrills is not currently an option, though
+%      probably it should be added eventually.
+%
+\def\topcaption#1#2\endcaption{%
+%      The captionwidth may have been changed by the user so we don't
+%      make the assumption that it is equal to \hsize - 2\indenti.
+  {\dimen@\hsize \advance\dimen@-\captionwidth@
+%      \raggedcenter@ uses the em so we set the font before calling
+%      it. \leftskip and \rightskip are changed by \raggedcenter so
+%      the modifications of \leftskip and \rightskip must come after.
+   \rm\raggedcenter@ \advance\leftskip.5\dimen@ \rightskip\leftskip
+  {\captionfont@#1}%
+%      Include period only if both caption number and text are present.
+  \if\notempty{#2}\if\notempty{#1}.\enspace\fi\ignorespaces#2\fi
+  \endgraf}\nobreak\bigskip}
+%
+%      For whatever reason, the style in current AMS production has
+%      figure captions (= \botcaption) set in a block while table
+%      captions are set ragged center style.
+%
+\def\botcaption#1#2\endcaption{%
+%      The previous vskip may be blank space for a figure, so we can't
+%      use \penaltyandskip@ here, otherwise the \bigskip would not be
+%      added (assuming the preceding vskip is greater than
+%      \bigskipamount):
+  \nobreak\bigskip
+%      Measure how wide the caption is.  Maybe it's only "Figure 1",
+%      or maybe it's "Figure 1. Blah blah blah ... for 10 lines."  In
+%      the first case center it, in the second case put it in
+%      paragraph form.  Include period only if both caption number and
+%      text are present.
+  \setboxz@h{\captionfont@#1\if\notempty{#2}\if\notempty{#1}.\enspace\fi
+    \rm\ignorespaces#2\fi}%
+  {\dimen@\hsize \advance\dimen@-\captionwidth@
+   \leftskip.5\dimen@ \rightskip\leftskip
+%      long caption---set it in a paragraph
+   \noindent \ifdim\wdz@>\captionwidth@
+%      short caption---add \hfil to balance with \parfillskip.
+   \else\hfil\fi
+  {\captionfont@#1}%
+  \if\notempty{#2}\if\notempty{#1}.\enspace\fi\rm\ignorespaces#2\fi\endgraf}}
+%
+%      Redefine plain TeX \@ins to add definition of \vspace (locally)
+%      for use with caption macros.  Also \captionwidth.
+%
+\def\@ins{\par\begingroup\def\vspace##1{\vskip##1\relax}%
+  \def\captionwidth##1{\captionwidth@##1\relax}%
+  \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup} % start a \vbox
+%
+%      CASE 1: \topcaption plus a table typed by the author.
+%
+%      \topinsert
+%      \topcaption{Table 1}This is a table caption.\endcaption
+%      \halign{ ...
+%       ...
+%      }
+%      \endinsert
+%
+%      CASE 2: \topcaption plus some blank space.
+%
+%      \midinsert
+%      \topcaption{Table 2}This is another table caption.\endcaption
+%      \vspace{13pc}
+%      \endinsert
+%
+%      CASE 3: \botcaption plus some blank space.
+%
+%      \topinsert
+%      \vspace{7pc}
+%      \botcaption{Figure 1}\endcaption
+%      \endinsert
+%
+%      Use of \captionwidth:
+%
+%      \topinsert
+%      \captionwidth{14pc}
+%      \topcaption{Table 1}Text ...
+%      \endcaption
+%      \endinsert
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -12- MISCELLANEOUS FORMATTING MACROS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{miscellaneous,}
+%    \block is intended for typing long quotes in a block, indented on
+%    both margins. It is set up so that it can be used in either of two
+%    ways:
+%
+%         $$\block...\endblock\tag1.1$$
+%
+%    or
+%
+%         Normal text.
+%         \block ...  \endblock
+%         Continue with more text.
+%
+%    In the latter case, we use a TeX display to provide spacing above
+%    and below the block. If we're in vertical mode when \block is
+%    called, we use \noindent to avoid getting an extra blank line
+%    before the display. But then we will get the short display skips
+%    instead of the full display skips, so we set \predisplaysize
+%    explicitly to ensure the full display skips.
+%
+\def\block{\RIfMIfI@\nondmatherr@\block\fi
+       \else\ifvmode\noindent$$\predisplaysize\hsize
+         \else$$\fi
+  \def\endblock{\par\egroup$$}\fi
+  \vbox\bgroup\advance\hsize-2\indenti\noindent}
+\def\endblock{\par\egroup}
+%
+%      In version 1 of amsppt \cite did some parsing to locate a comma
+%      in its argument and if one was found the font was switched from
+%      \citefont to \rm.  In version 2 we no longer do this because if
+%      a \cite deviates too much from the expected form we run into
+%      problems:  The expected form was either \cite{13}, or \cite{13,
+%      Theorem 2.2}.  But if for example the user wants to cite two
+%      references together, \cite{13,15}, we don't want to switch off
+%      \citefont after the comma.  And since authors tend to invent
+%      even more imaginative variations than this, we just did away
+%      with the parsing altogether.
+%
+%      \m@th is in case the author uses subscripts in his citation
+%      codes.
+%
+\def\cite#1{\rom{[{\citefont@\m@th#1}]}}
+%
+%      In version 1 of amsppt \citefont was \bf.
+%
+\def\citefont@{\rm}
+%
+%      \rom provides a way for getting roman punctuation and numerals
+%      in italic text. It takes pains to handle italic corrections
+%      reasonably nicely.
+%
+\def\rom#1{\leavevmode
+  \edef\prevskip@{\ifdim\lastskip=\z@ \else\hskip\the\lastskip\relax\fi}%
+  \unskip
+  \edef\prevpenalty@{\ifnum\lastpenalty=\z@ \else
+    \penalty\the\lastpenalty\relax\fi}%
+  \unpenalty \/\prevpenalty@ \prevskip@ {\rm #1}}
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -13- BIBLIOGRAPHY
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{references,}
+%
+\def\refsfont@{\eightpoint}
+\def\refsheadfont@{\headfont@}
+%
+%      \refindentwd controls the indention from the left margin of the
+%      ref item numbers or key labels.  The initial setting is to 2
+%      decimal digits; numbers up to 99 will be aligned on the right
+%      within a box the width of \refindentwd.  \key labels will be
+%      aligned on the LEFT within a box of the same width; but when
+%      \key's are being used, the indention may need to be increased
+%      if it's required that the labels remain clear from the text.
+%      The \widestnumber macro can be used to do this:
+%      \widestnumber\key{MNOPQ} will increase \refindentwd to the
+%      width of a box containing "[MNOPQ]\enspace". \widestnumber can
+%      also be used with \no: \widestnumber\no{000} for 3-digit
+%      numbers, \widestnumber\no{0} for 1-digit numbers, and so on.
+%      However, the use of \no, with or without \widestnumber, is
+%      deprecated, and this use will not be documented in the user's
+%      guide.
+%
+\newdimen\refindentwd
+\setboxz@h{\refsfont@ 00.\enspace}
+\refindentwd\wdz@
+%
+%      Allow the default title for the references to be varied easily;
+%      users will still be instructed to change it using \nofrills.
+\def\Refsname{References}
+\outer\def\Refs{\add@missing\endroster \add@missing\endproclaim
+ \let\savedef@\Refs \let\Refs\relax % because of \outer-ness
+ \def\Refs##1{\restoredef@\Refs
+%      For a monograph where the title of the References section is
+%      done using \title, we want to omit the normal "References"
+%      heading and the vertical skips above and below.  This can be
+%      accomplished using \Refs\nofrills{}.  As long as the vskip at
+%      the end of \endtopmatter is not less than \aboveheadskip and
+%      \belowheadskip, this will be accomplished by the fact that
+%      \penaltyandskip@ doesn't add to a previous larger vskip, and
+%      the ragged center part will simply vanish if #1 is empty.
+   \if\notempty{##1}\penaltyandskip@{-200}\aboveheadskip
+     \begingroup \raggedcenter@\refsheadfont@
+       \ignorespaces##1\endgraf\endgroup
+     \penaltyandskip@\@M\belowheadskip
+   \fi
+   \begingroup\def\envir@end{\endRefs}\refsfont@\sfcode`\.\@m
+   }%
+%      This line here is a little tricky. If a \nofrills is found when
+%      we look ahead, then \frills@ will become equal to \eat@ and it
+%      will eat "References" before \Refs is allowed to read its
+%      argument.  Also we have to use a \csname trick to get around
+%      the outerness of \Refs.  MJD
+ \nofrillscheck{\csname Refs\expandafter\endcsname
+  \frills@{{\Refsname}}}}
+%
+\def\endRefs{\par % This will check for a missing \endref, also
+  \endgroup}
+%
+%      These two conditionals are used for handling the logic of
+%      typesetting book versus journal article versus proceedings
+%      article references.
+\newif\ifbook@ \newif\ifprocpaper@
+%
+%      The \else clause here is to handle the case when \nofrills is
+%      used outside of the References section in an unexpected place
+%      (i.e., not immediately after \proclaim, \definition, \head, or
+%      the other things that have a \nofrills option).
+%
+\def\nofrills{%
+%      Are we inside a \ref...\endref pair?  If so, OK to continue.
+  \expandafter\ifx\envir@end\endref
+    \let\do\relax
+    \xdef\nofrills@list{\nofrills@list\do\curbox}%
+  \else\errmessage{\Invalid@@ \string\nofrills}%
+  \fi}%
+%
+\def\defaultreftexts{\gdef\edtext{ed.}\gdef\pagestext{pp.}%
+  \gdef\voltext{vol.}\gdef\issuetext{no.}}
+\defaultreftexts
+%
+\def\ref{\par
+  \begingroup \def\envir@end{\endref}%
+%      Start the reference.
+  \noindent\hangindent\refindentwd
+%      Change \par so that it will supply a (presumably) missing
+%      \endref, with an error message.
+  \def\par{\add@missing\endref}%
+%      Footnotes get lost in references on account of the extensive
+%      boxing; change \footnote to emit a warning message.
+  \let\orig@footnote\footnote
+  \def\footnote{\message{AmS-TeX warning: \string\footnote\space within
+       a reference will disappear;^^J
+       use \string\footnotemark\space \string\footnotetext\space instead}%
+    \orig@footnote}%
+%      \nofrills@list should always be assigned globally, to conserve
+%      save stack.
+  \global\let\nofrills@list\empty@
+%
+%      Change \linebreak and \mathbreak to work properly in the
+%      special ref environment.
+  \refbreaks
+  \procpaper@false \book@false \moreref@false
+%      Start an initial box, to match up properly with the first
+%      upcoming \makerefbox; this will be discarded.
+  \def\curbox{\z@}\setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+}
+%
+%      \keyhook@ is used for switching  the style of reference labels
+%      automatically behind the scenes. This is for phasing in,
+%      without loss of backward compatibility, a \refstyle command to
+%      implement the various reference styles currently used in AMS
+%      production.  [19-MAR-1991] See the definition of \refstyle.
+%
+\let\keyhook@\empty@
+%
+\def\endref{%
+%      To wind up the preceding box it is convenient to call
+%      \makerefbox again; it will also open a new box, however, so we
+%      give it arguments \thr@@ and \endgraf\egroup that will cause
+%      the new box to be closed immediately and discarded. But we must
+%      first make sure box 3 is void or we'll trigger an error
+%      message.  This is done by dumping the current contents of
+%      (global register) box 3 into (local register) box 2; the \box
+%      command always makes its argument globally void.  (Because box
+%      0 is used heavily in \makerefbox, it's easier to just use box 2
+%      here, rather than try to verify that using box 0 would be safe
+%      in all cases.)
+  \setbox\tw@\box\thr@@
+  \makerefbox?\thr@@{\endgraf\egroup}%
+%      Then we call \endref@ to take all the saved material and
+%      combine it into a paragraph, adding punctuation to separate
+%      pieces.
+  \endref@
+%      The \endgraf is done here rather than in \endref@ because in
+%      \moreref or \transl cases \endref@ shouldn't do the \endgraf.
+  \endgraf
+%      Finally, we need to close the group that was started by \ref.
+%      This has the effect of killing the current definition of
+%      \envir@end, among other things.
+  \endgroup
+  \keyhook@
+  \global\let\keyhook@\empty@ % \global to conserve save stack
+}
+%
+\def\key{\gdef\key{\makerefbox\key\keybox@\empty@}\key} \newbox\keybox@
+%    \no is deprecated in favor of \key; it remains here only for the
+%    purpose of compatibility with existing files.
+\def\no{\gdef\no{\makerefbox\no\keybox@\empty@}%
+  \gdef\keyhook@{\refstyle C}\no}
+\def\by{\makerefbox\by\bybox@\empty@} \newbox\bybox@
+\let\manyby\by % for backward compatibility
+\def\bysame{\by\hbox to3em{\hrulefill}\thinspace\kern\z@}
+\def\paper{\makerefbox\paper\paperbox@\it} \newbox\paperbox@
+\def\paperinfo{\makerefbox\paperinfo\paperinfobox@\empty@}%
+  \newbox\paperinfobox@
+\def\jour{\makerefbox\jour\jourbox@
+  {\aftergroup\book@false \aftergroup\procpaper@false}} \newbox\jourbox@
+\def\issue{\makerefbox\issue\issuebox@\empty@} \newbox\issuebox@
+\def\yr{\makerefbox\yr\yrbox@\empty@} \newbox\yrbox@
+\def\pages{\makerefbox\pages\pagesbox@\empty@} \newbox\pagesbox@
+\def\page{\gdef\pagestext{p.}\makerefbox\page\pagesbox@\empty@}
+\def\ed{\makerefbox\ed\edbox@\empty@} \newbox\edbox@
+\def\eds{\gdef\edtext{eds.}\makerefbox\eds\edbox@\empty@}
+%      The \aftergroup\book@true here sets the \ifbook@ switch so that
+%      later (in \endref@) we will know whether we are typesetting a
+%      book, a journal article, or a proceedings article. Could use
+%      \global instead of \aftergroup but avoiding \global is usually
+%      safer when possible.
+\def\book{\makerefbox\book\bookbox@
+  {\it\aftergroup\book@true \aftergroup\procpaper@false}}
+  \newbox\bookbox@
+\def\bookinfo{\makerefbox\bookinfo\bookinfobox@\empty@}%
+  \newbox\bookinfobox@
+\def\publ{\makerefbox\publ\publbox@\empty@} \newbox\publbox@
+\def\publaddr{\makerefbox\publaddr\publaddrbox@\empty@}%
+  \newbox\publaddrbox@
+%      See the above comment for \book about the \aftergroup
+\def\inbook{\makerefbox\inbook\bookbox@
+  {\aftergroup\procpaper@true \aftergroup\book@false}}
+\def\procinfo{\makerefbox\procinfo\procinfobox@\empty@}%
+  \newbox\procinfobox@
+\def\finalinfo{\makerefbox\finalinfo\finalinfobox@\empty@}%
+  \newbox\finalinfobox@
+\def\miscnote{\makerefbox\miscnote\miscnotebox@\empty@}%
+  \newbox\miscnotebox@
+\def\toappear{\miscnote to appear}
+\def\lang{\makerefbox\lang\langbox@\empty@} \newbox\langbox@
+\newbox\morerefbox@
+%
+%      \vol is special because in AMS style it takes a different font
+%      depending on whether it's a journal volume or a book volume.
+%
+\def\vol{\makerefbox\vol\volbox@{\ifbook@ \else
+  \ifprocpaper@\else\bf\fi\fi}}
+\newbox\volbox@
+%
+%    \MR has to take its argument in braces in order to pick out the
+%    volume number and make it bold. For consistency we do the same for
+%    AMSPPS. [mjd,17-Aug-1995]
+%    Provide an MR number for a bibliography item.
+\define\MR#1{\makerefbox\MR\MRbox@\empty@
+  \def\next@##1:##2:##3\next@{\ifx @##2\empty@##1\else{\bf##1:}##2\fi}%
+  MR \next@#1:@:\next@}
+%
+\newbox\MRbox@
+%
+%    User-comand for citing a preprint on the AMS preprint server.
+%    \MR and \AMSPPS are mutually exclusive (at least in normal use), so
+%    we can use \MRbox@ here instead of allocating another box.
+%
+%    Without the discretionary hyphen, AMSPPS would break as AM-SPPS.
+%
+\define\AMSPPS#1{\makerefbox\AMSPPS\MRbox@\empty@ AMS\-PPS \##1}
+%
+%    Assume for the moment that \CMP and \MR commands won't occur in
+%    the same ref. Too much heavy-duty programming required otherwise.
+%    [mjd,1995/09/28]
+\define\CMP#1{\makerefbox\CMP\MRbox@\empty@ CMP #1}
+%
+\newbox\holdoverbox
+%
+%      \makerefbox takes three arguments: the first is the name of
+%      the calling macro, for use in error messages; argument 2
+%      is the box used for storing data (note: some boxes are shared
+%      by more than one calling macro); argument 3 is additional
+%      material (optional---may be empty) that may be used to
+%      affect the contents of the box.
+%
+\def\makerefbox#1#2#3{\endgraf
+%      Set box 0 to the just-completed line of text.
+  \setbox\z@\lastbox
+%      Although \holdoverbox will usually be void it still doesn't
+%      hurt to \unhbox it here in every case, which simplifies the
+%      programming.
+  \global\setbox\@ne\hbox{\unhbox\holdoverbox
+%      \ifvoid test is necessary here to prevent a \linebreak at the
+%      end of a field from being removed by the \unpenalty.
+    \ifvoid\z@\else\unhbox\z@\unskip\unskip\unpenalty\fi}%
+  \egroup
+%      If box 1 is empty (width <= 0pt) then set the current box to
+%      void (it might still have a baselineskip glue or something in
+%      it at this point, for one thing).  Otherwise set it to box 1.
+  \setbox\curbox\box\ifdim\wd\@ne>\z@ \@ne \else\voidb@x\fi
+%    That finishes the previous box.  Now let's start a new one
+%    using the box given as arg 1 of \makerefbox. But first check
+%    to see if it's void and if not give an error message.
+  \ifvoid#2\else\Err@{Redundant \string#1; duplicate use, or
+     mutually exclusive information already given}\fi
+  \def\curbox{#2}\setbox\curbox\vbox\bgroup \hsize\maxdimen \noindent
+  #3}
+%
+\def\refbreaks{%
+  \def\refconcat##1{\setbox\z@\lastbox \setbox\holdoverbox\hbox{%
+       \unhbox\holdoverbox \unhbox\z@\unskip\unskip\unpenalty##1}}%
+  \def\holdover##1{%
+    \RIfM@
+%    Break the current line, adding \null to ensure proper spacing for
+%    a preceding mathrel or mathbin. The blank line containing the
+%    \null will be discarded by later processing.
+      \penalty-\@M\null
+%      Put a temporary ending of the current math formula on the next
+%      line, by itself.
+      \hfil$\clubpenalty\z@\widowpenalty\z@\interlinepenalty\z@
+      \offinterlineskip\endgraf
+%      Now remove that unwanted extra line and the preceding \lineskip
+%      (of 0pt) and any  penalty.  There shouldn't be any penalty,
+%      actually, because the relevant penalties were set to 0 above;
+%      but the \unpenalty is harmless and perhaps there is an
+%      overlooked eventuality that it will catch.
+      \setbox\z@\lastbox\unskip \unpenalty
+      \refconcat{##1}%
+      \noindent
+%      Since we did a temporary end of the current math formula there
+%      remains some more math coming up; therefore we need to shift
+%      into math mode again.  By breaking immediately after the
+%      beginning of the math formula we leave the unwanted extra
+%      \mathon item in a line by itself; this will be ignored because
+%      in the unpacking process we will only take the last line out of
+%      the current \vbox.
+      $\hfil\penalty-\@M
+%      No \null here because we don't need to do anything extra to
+%      affect the math spacing of the following item. (Line breaks
+%      in math formulas always occur after a \mathbin or \mathrel,
+%      not before, according to AMS style.)
+    \else
+      \endgraf\refconcat{##1}\noindent
+    \fi}%
+  \def\break{\holdover{\penalty-\@M}}%
+  \let\vadjust@\vadjust
+  \def\vadjust##1{\holdover{\vadjust@{##1}}}%
+%      It seems unlikely that \newpage will be needed inside of a
+%      \ref...\endref construction (more likely it will occur between
+%      references, if at all).  So we provide only a very simple
+%      alternate version using \vadjust.
+  \def\newpage{\vadjust{\vfill\break}}%
+}
+%
+\def\refstyle#1{\uppercase{%
+  \gdef\refstyle@{#1}%
+  \if#1A\relax \def\keyformat##1{[##1]\enspace\hfil}%
+  \else\if#1B\relax
+    \refindentwd\parindent
+    \def\keyformat##1{\aftergroup\kern
+              \aftergroup-\aftergroup\refindentwd}%
+  \else\if#1C\relax
+    \def\keyformat##1{\hfil##1.\enspace}%
+  \fi\fi\fi}% end of \uppercase
+}
+%
+%      Make letters the default for ref labels. This is chosen over
+%      refstyle C with a view to eventually phasing out \no in favor
+%      of always using \key, with the formatting being determined by
+%      the refstyle setting.
+\refstyle{A}
+%
+%      You might think that \refbreak@ shouldn't be necessary here (it
+%      executes a line break if the user specified \linebreak in the
+%      last field of the reference), but: sometimes there will be a
+%      language after the final period, and conceivably someone might
+%      need to break the line after the period and before the
+%      language.
+\def\finalpunct{\ifnum\lastkern=\m@ne\unkern\else.\spacefactor2000 \fi
+       \refquotes@\refbreak@}%
+\def\continuepunct#1#2#3#4{}%
+%
+%      \endref@ is shared by \endref, \moreref, and \transl, therefore
+%      some of the code needs to be circumspect.
+\def\endref@{%
+%      Change the format of the reference label, if necessary:
+  \keyhook@
+%      This variant definition of \nofrillscheck is embedded in
+%      \endref@ despite the slight cost in extra execution time, in
+%      order to allow, e.g., subheadings within a bibliography section
+%      to have normal \nofrills action.
+  \def\nofrillscheck##1{%
+    \def\do####1{\ifx##1####1\let\frills@\eat@\fi}%
+    \let\frills@\identity@ \nofrills@list}%
+%      If no author name was given, but editor name was given, then
+%      transfer it to the author name box so that it will print at the
+%      beginning of the reference.  This  would normally happen only
+%      in the case of a proceedings volume or other such collection,
+%      cited as a whole.
+  \ifvoid\bybox@
+    \ifvoid\edbox@
+    \else\setbox\bybox@\hbox{\unhbox\edbox@\breakcheck
+      \nofrillscheck\edbox@\frills@{\space(\edtext)}\refbreak@}\fi
+  \fi
+%      \noindent \hangindent\refindentwd was done earlier by \ref, so
+%      at this point we just need to put the reference label on the
+%      page.
+%
+%      Using this \ifvoid test is partly to prevent accessing \keybox@
+%      in the \moreref and \transl cases:
+  \ifvoid\keybox@\else\hbox to\refindentwd{%
+       \keyformat{\unhbox\keybox@}}\fi
+  \ifmoreref@
+%      Even though this reads ``\commaunbox@,'' a semicolon will be
+%      substituted for the comma by the action of \punct@ if
+%      \morerefbox@ is in fact not void.  (And note that both \transl
+%      and \moreref share \morerefbox@.)
+    \commaunbox@\morerefbox@
+  \else
+%      Put in some special kerns to flag the beginning of a reference,
+%      to avoid adding unwanted punctuation and space if \by is omitted.
+    \kern-\tw@ sp\kern\m@ne sp
+  \fi
+  \ppunbox@\empty@\empty@\bybox@\empty@
+  \ifbook@ % Case 1: \book etc.
+    \commaunbox@\bookbox@ \commaunbox@\bookinfobox@
+    \ppunbox@\empty@{ (}\procinfobox@)%
+    \ppunbox@,{ vol.~}\volbox@\empty@
+    \ppunbox@\empty@{ (}\edbox@{, \edtext)}%
+    \commaunbox@\publbox@ \commaunbox@\publaddrbox@
+    \commaunbox@\yrbox@
+    \ppunbox@,{ \pagestext~}\pagesbox@\empty@
+  \else
+    \commaunbox@\paperbox@ \commaunbox@\paperinfobox@
+    \ifprocpaper@ % Case 2: \paper ... \inbook
+      \commaunbox@\bookbox@
+      \ppunbox@\empty@{ (}\procinfobox@)%
+      \ppunbox@\empty@{ (}\edbox@{, \edtext)}%
+      \commaunbox@\bookinfobox@
+      \ppunbox@,{ \voltext~}\volbox@\empty@
+      \commaunbox@\publbox@ \commaunbox@\publaddrbox@
+      \commaunbox@\yrbox@
+      \ppunbox@,{ \pagestext~}\pagesbox@\empty@
+    \else % Case 3: \paper ... \jour
+      \commaunbox@\jourbox@
+      \ppunbox@\empty@{ }\volbox@\empty@
+      \ppunbox@\empty@{ (}\yrbox@)%
+      \ppunbox@,{ \issuetext~}\issuebox@\empty@
+%      Although \publ and \publaddr will rarely be used with a journal
+%      article, it doesn't really hurt to print them if provided, and
+%      certain rare cases may benefit.  E.g.:
+%
+%      \paper \"Uber maximale Monotonie von Operatoren des Typs
+%      $L^\ast \Phi\circ L$ \paperinfo Report 78-24 \publ Math. Inst.,
+%      Univ. K\"oln \yr 1978 \moreref\jour  published as Manuscripta
+%      Math. \vol28 \yr1979\pages 305--316
+%
+      \commaunbox@\publbox@ \commaunbox@\publaddrbox@
+      \commaunbox@\pagesbox@
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \commaunbox@\finalinfobox@
+  \ppunbox@\empty@{ (}\miscnotebox@)%
+%      The final punctuation (usually a period) here is not part of a
+%      \ppunbox@ clause because it is always inserted even if
+%      \langbox@ and \MRbox@ are void.
+  \finalpunct
+%    Tweak the spacefactor after langbox to suppress the comma that
+%    would otherwise be added between lang and MR.
+  \ppunbox@\empty@{ (}\langbox@{)\spacefactor1001 }%
+%    Print an MR or AMSPPS number
+  \ifnum\spacefactor>\@m \ppunbox@{}{ }\MRbox@\empty@
+  \else \commaunbox@\MRbox@
+  \fi
+%      Restore defaults "ed.", "pp.", etc. in case they were changed.
+  \defaultreftexts
+}
+%
+%      \punct@ is the same as \identity@, but we define it rather than
+%      using \let, just in case the contents of amsppt.sty ever get
+%      shuffled around in such a way that \identity@ is later in the
+%      file.
+\def\punct@#1{#1}
+%      \ppunbox@ takes 4 arguments.  #1 is punctuation that should
+%      precede ending quotes and/or a line breaking penalty, from the
+%      previous item.  #2 is material (usually a word space) that
+%      should come after ending quotes or a penalty.  #3 is the box
+%      containing the next part of the current reference.  #4 is other
+%      material to follow box #3 (e.g., a closing parenthesis, in some
+%      cases).
+%
+\def\ppunbox@#1#2#3#4{\ifvoid#3\else
+  \let\prespace@\relax
+%      If nofrills was specified for the previous item, then it will
+%      have been ended with a kern of -1sp.  If we find such a kern,
+%      we remove it and omit the normal punctuation (arg #1).
+  \ifnum\lastkern=\m@ne \unkern\let\punct@\eat@
+%      A kern of -2sp here means we are at the very beginning of the
+%      reference, after the key or number. In that case we need to
+%      omit not only the punctuation, but also any following space.
+    \ifnum\lastkern=-\tw@ \unkern\let\prespace@\ignorespaces \fi
+  \fi
+  \nofrillscheck#3%
+  \punct@{#1}\refquotes@\refbreak@
+%      Restore normal definition of \punct@:
+  \let\punct@\identity@
+  \prespace@
+%      If \nofrills is not in effect, the \space will be eaten;
+%      otherwise it will be substituted for the normal pre-item
+%      frills.
+  \frills@{#2\eat@}\space
+%      \refquotes@ and \refbreak@ will be emptied by \breakcheck
+%      (unless of course there is a new line breaking penalty present
+%      for next time around).
+  \unhbox#3\breakcheck
+  \frills@{#4\eat@}{\kern\m@ne sp}\fi}
+%
+\def\commaunbox@#1{\ppunbox@,\space{#1}\empty@}
+%
+%      By putting the \ifnum here inside the \edef we get automatic
+%      initialization of \refbreak@ for the next time around, instead
+%      of needing an extra \let\refbreak@\empty@ step after \refbreak@
+%      is used.
+\def\breakcheck{\edef\refbreak@{\ifnum\lastpenalty=\z@\else
+  \penalty\the\lastpenalty\relax\fi}\unpenalty}
+%
+%      For quotes, the complication is that the ending quotes must
+%      fall after a comma or other such punctuation that might come
+%      next (we don't know yet what punctuation will be used, if any).
+%      And in addition we have the usual possibility of a line break
+%      to worry about at the same time.  Therefore the special control
+%      sequence \endquotes is provided, to be used like this, if let's
+%      say you want book titles to appear in quotes:
+%
+%      \ppunbox@,{ ``}\bookbox@\endquotes
+%      \commaunbox@\bookinfobox@
+%
+%      \endquotes defines the control sequence \refquotes@ to add the
+%      ending quotes later, after we find out whether a comma, period,
+%      or no punctuation at all will be added (not to mention maybe a
+%      line breaking penalty that would need to be shuffled around).
+%
+\def\endquotes{\def\refquotes@{''\let\refquotes@\empty@}}
+\let\refquotes@\empty@
+\let\refbreak@\empty@
+%
+%    We need a switch to handle certain complications with the moreref
+%    case.
+%
+\newif\ifmoreref@
+%
+%    \moreref ends the previous setbox operation, does \endref@ to
+%    typeset any information gathered so far, and then prepares to
+%    start the equivalent of a new \ref.
+%
+\def\moreref{%
+%    To wind up the preceding box it is convenient to call
+%    \makerefbox again; it will also open a new box, however, so we
+%    give it arguments \thr@@ and \endgraf\egroup that will cause the
+%    new box to be closed immediately and discarded. But we must first
+%    make sure box 3 is void or we'll trigger an error message.  This
+%    is done by dumping the current contents of (global register) box
+%    3 into (local register) box 2; the \box command always makes its
+%    argument globally void.  (Because box 0 is used heavily in
+%    \makerefbox, it's easier to just use box 2 here, rather than try
+%    to verify that using box 0 would be safe in all cases.)
+  \setbox\tw@\box\thr@@
+  \makerefbox?\thr@@{\endgraf\egroup}%
+%    This saved definition will be lost if something else in \endref@
+%    uses \savedef@.  Currently (14-MAR-1991) that is not the case,
+%    however, so doing it this way allows us to save a bit of memory.
+  \let\savedef@\finalpunct  \let\finalpunct\empty@
+  \endref@
+%    The next time \punct@ is called by \ppunbox, it will change
+%    ",\refquotes@" into "\refquotes@;" or similarly for
+%    \empty@\refquotes@.  Then \punct@ will be restored to its original
+%    definition.  Note that this definition does not need to be
+%    global; it is local inside the \begingroup ...\endgroup of the
+%    current \ref.
+  \def\punct@##1##2{##2;}%
+  \global\let\nofrills@list\empty@ % global, to conserve save stack
+%      Now restore the normal definition of \finalpunct :
+  \let\finalpunct\savedef@
+  \moreref@true
+%    Set any initial text between \moreref and the following
+%    control sequence in \morerefbox@. This is typically used with
+%    \transl to add a note such as "English transl."
+  \def\curbox{\morerefbox@}%
+  \setbox\morerefbox@\vbox\bgroup \hsize\maxdimen \noindent
+}
+%    And \transl, for setting translation information,
+%    doesn't need to be any different than \moreref:
+%
+\def\transl{\moreref}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -14- END OF DOCUMENT
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{end of document,}
+%
+%    Make sure that the primitive \end can be executed; \end may be redefined
+%    for some purposes where input errors are likely to occur.
+\ifx\plainend\undefined \let\plainend\end \fi
+\outer\def\enddocument{\par% \par will do a runaway check for \endref
+  \add@missing\endRefs
+  \check@missing@document
+%      Repeat these in case an article (or book chapter!) doesn't have
+%      a references section:
+  \add@missing\endroster \add@missing\endproclaim
+  \add@missing\enddefinition
+  \add@missing\enddemo \add@missing\endremark \add@missing\endexample
+  \enddocument@text
+  \vfill\supereject\plainend}
+
+%      One non-ending element that can be missing is \document.
+\def\check@missing@document{%
+  \ifdocument@
+  \else
+    \Err@{You seem to have a missing or misspelled \string\document}%
+  \fi}
+
+\def\enddocument@text{%
+%      In a monograph we expect the translator name and author
+%      addresses to be handled in the front matter rather than at the
+%      end of the individual chapters:
+  \ifmonograph@ % do nothing
+  \else
+%      No break between the References and the final matter.
+    \nobreak
+%      The \address's get printed at the end of the paper.  Also the
+%      translator name, if any.  We don't need to do an
+%      \ifx\thetranslator@\empty@, as we did with \thesubjclass@ and
+%      other items in \endtopmatter, because we're not constructing a
+%      footnote, just slapping the material on the page.
+    \thetranslator@
+%      Print all the \address's, including e-mail and url addresses if
+%      present. If any of the \email's are undefined the \csname will
+%      just evaluate to \relax.
+    \count@\z@
+    \loop\ifnum\count@<\addresscount@\advance\count@\@ne
+      \csname address\number\count@\endcsname
+      \csname email\number\count@\endcsname
+      \csname urladdr\number\count@\endcsname
+    \repeat
+  \fi
+}
+
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -15- OUTPUT ROUTINE
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{output routine,}
+%      We provide a \foliofont@ separate from \headlinefont@ because
+%      it is not uncommon for documentstyles to have the folios in a
+%      different font, although in our basic style this is not the
+%      case.  \foliofont@ is \eightrm instead of \eightpoint merely
+%      for efficiency; we don't expect to need for example math family
+%      assignments in order to typeset the folio.  On the other hand
+%      we need full math capability for \headlinefont@ since running
+%      heads may contain math (from a title or a section head).  From
+%      a design standpoint it might be preferable to have seven-point
+%      running heads (compare a small caps \head that falls at the top
+%      of a page with the running head above it) but it is more
+%      convenient to use the already available \eightpoint macro, and
+%      this saves a bit of overhead.
+%
+\def\folio{\ifnum\pageno<\z@ \romannumeral-\pageno\else\number\pageno \fi}
+\def\foliofont@{\eightrm}
+\def\headlinefont@{\eightpoint}
+%
+%      \leftheadline and \rightheadline use the method described in
+%      the TeXbook, p. 260 for selecting different pieces of the
+%      topmark or botmark.  The necessary \else is inserted by
+%      \leftheadtext and \rightheadtext.  \foliofont@ is applied
+%      within the headline (it was formerly included in \folio).
+%      Thus \folio comprises only the page number, making it suitable
+%      for compiling index terms for use with the non-AMS package
+%      index.tex; there is no intention to add an indexing facility
+%      to AMS-TeX.
+%
+\def\leftheadline{\rlap{\foliofont@\folio}\hfill \iftrue\topmark\fi \hfill}
+\def\rightheadline{\hfill \expandafter\iffalse\botmark\fi
+  \hfill \llap{\foliofont@\folio}}
+%
+\newtoks\leftheadtoks
+\newtoks\rightheadtoks
+%
+%      \leftheadtext and \rightheadtext have a \nofrills option to
+%      turn off uppercasing.  They also set their argument in a box,
+%      during a syntax check, because otherwise syntax errors in the
+%      argument would not be caught (because the output routine, and
+%      hence \headline, is never called during a syntax check).
+%
+\def\leftheadtext{\let\savedef@\leftheadtext
+  \def\leftheadtext##1{\let\leftheadtext\savedef@
+    \leftheadtoks\expandafter{\frills@\uppercasetext@{##1}}%
+    \mark{\the\leftheadtoks\noexpand\else\the\rightheadtoks}
+    \ifsyntax@\setboxz@h{\def\\{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+        \headlinefont@##1}\fi}%
+  \nofrillscheck\leftheadtext}
+%
+\def\rightheadtext{\let\savedef@\rightheadtext
+  \def\rightheadtext##1{\let\rightheadtext\savedef@
+    \rightheadtoks\expandafter{\frills@\uppercasetext@{##1}}%
+    \mark{\the\leftheadtoks\noexpand\else\the\rightheadtoks}%
+    \ifsyntax@\setboxz@h{\def\\{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+        \headlinefont@##1}\fi}%
+  \nofrillscheck\rightheadtext}
+%
+%      In the running heads, we redefine \chapter so that it only does
+%      a roman numeral (via \chapterno@) rather than "CHAPTER " +
+%      roman numeral. In the \nofrills case, however, e.g. for
+%      something like "Appendix A", the given text is printed without
+%      modification.  And we redefine \\ because if the running head
+%      is taken from a title or section head it might possibly contain
+%      a \\ from the line-breaking done in the original text.
+%
+\headline={\def\\{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}\headlinefont@
+  \def\chapter{%
+    \def\chapter##1{%
+      \frills@{\afterassignment\chapterno@ \chaptercount@=}##1.\space}%
+    \nofrillscheck\chapter}%
+  \ifodd\pageno \rightheadline \else \leftheadline\fi}
+%
+%      Capitalization is used to indicate global scope of
+%      \NoRunningHeads and \NoPageNumbers, as is done by amstex.tex
+%      for \TagsOnLeft, etc.
+%
+\def\NoRunningHeads{\global\runheads@false\global\let\headmark\eat@}
+\def\NoPageNumbers{\gdef\folio{}}
+%
+%      Finally, we are ready for the \output routine. It is based on
+%      the \plainoutput routine, but the first page normally has the
+%      `Typeset by AmS-TeX' logo attached, and we add a switch for
+%      running heads.  The default for running heads is "true".
+%
+\newif\iffirstpage@     \firstpage@true
+\newif\ifrunheads@      \runheads@true
+%
+\output={\output@}
+%
+\newdimen\headlineheight \newdimen\headlinespace
+\newdimen\dropfoliodepth
+
+%    Distance of drop folio below the type block
+\dropfoliodepth=1pc
+%    Actual height of normal running head text
+\headlineheight=5pt
+%    Base-to-base distance from running head to first text line
+\headlinespace=24pt
+
+%    Changing the page width with \pagewidth automatically adjusts the
+%    caption width as well. \pagewidth is in AMSTEX.TEX but it sets the
+%    caption width to a different value than the one we want.
+\def\pagewidth#1{\hsize#1%
+   \captionwidth@\hsize \advance\captionwidth@-2\indenti}
+%
+%    Constraints on type block:
+%    ---Total width x height (default) = 30pc x 50.5pc
+%    ---Distance from running-head to first text line (base-to-base) is
+%    24pt.
+%    ---Actual height of running head is approx. 5pt (height of cap
+%    letters in seven-point font).
+%    ---Drop folio on first page drops 1pc below the type block (i.e.,
+%    below the 50.5pc measurement given above).
+
+\def\pageheight#1{%
+  \vsize=#1 % target height
+  \advance\vsize -\headlineheight % subtract height of running head
+  \advance\vsize -\headlinespace % subtract space below running head
+  \advance\vsize \topskip % but the 24pt is base-to-base, so we need to
+                          % compensate for topskip
+}
+
+\pagewidth{30pc}\pageheight{50.5pc}
+
+%    Copyright info at the bottom of article opening pages is done as
+%    an insert separate from \footins because that is the natural way
+%    to achieve the placement we want (below all footnotes, but inside
+%    the text block).
+\newinsert\copyins
+%    Space to allow for, between copyright info and preceding text:
+%    *** Different from AMS-LaTeX value, which is 1.5pc fixed
+%    *** (\bigskipamount=12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt; plain.tex)
+\skip\copyins=12\p@
+%    Maximum height of copyright info: Doesn't really matter, since height
+%    will always be controlled explicitly, but let's make sure this
+%    value referred to by TeX is less than page height anyway.
+\dimen\copyins=40pc
+%    Magnification factor (1000 = 1.000)
+\count\copyins=1000
+%
+%    \inslogo@ is called in \endtopmatter (unlike the method of
+%    amsppt.sty 2.1)
+\def\inslogo@{\insert\copyins{\logo@}}
+%
+\def\logo@{\rightline{\eightpoint Typeset by \AmSTeX}}
+%    \nologo to turn off the `Typeset by AmS-TeX' note.
+\def\nologo{\let\logo@\empty@ \let\inslogo@\empty@}
+%
+%    First-page left or right headline:
+\let\flheadline\hfil \let\frheadline\hfil
+%
+%    Permit pages (e.g. book frontmatter) to be without headers or footers.
+\newif\ifplain@  \plain@false
+%
+\def\output@{%
+%    Cancel possible junk from \ref if page break occurs between
+%    \ref...\endref [mjd,17-Aug-1995]
+  \def\break{\penalty-\@M}\let\par\endgraf
+  \shipout\vbox{%
+    \ifplain@
+      \let\makeheadline\relax \let\makefootline\relax
+    \else
+      \iffirstpage@ \global\firstpage@false
+        \let\rightheadline\frheadline
+        \let\leftheadline\flheadline
+      \else
+        \ifrunheads@ \let\makefootline\relax
+        \else \let\makeheadline\relax \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \makeheadline \pagebody \makefootline
+  }%
+  \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-\@MM\else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+%
+%    Redefine \pagecontents to add \copyins material
+%    *** \skip\footins=\bigskipamount (12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt; plain.tex)
+%    *** In AMS-LaTeX, value = 7pt plus11pt
+\def\pagecontents{%
+  \ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+  \dimen@=\dp\@cclv \unvbox\@cclv % open up \box255
+  \ifvoid\footins
+  \else % footnote info is present
+    \vskip\skip\footins
+    \footnoterule
+    \unvbox\footins
+  \fi
+  \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi
+%    \skip\copyins is visual space between top of copyright info and
+%    bottom of preceding text.
+  \ifvoid\copyins \else \vskip\skip\copyins \unvbox\copyins \fi
+}
+%
+%    \makeheadline is called at the top of a vbox with the page body to
+%    follow.  Restore default \leftskip to avoid indentation when the
+%    page builder activates in the middle of a roster
+\def\makeheadline{%
+  \leftskip=\z@
+  \vbox{%
+%    We smash the running head inside a vbox of the target height, to
+%    ensure that the base of the running head always falls at the same
+%    height in relation to the type block.
+    \vbox to\headlineheight{\vss
+%    If \headline is empty, the \hskip here prevents an `Underfull hbox'
+%    message. If \headline contains an \hfil or \hfill, the \hskip here
+%    will be ignored.
+      \hbox to\hsize{\hskip\z@ plus\hsize\the\headline}%
+      \kern-\prevdepth
+    }%
+    \vskip\headlinespace
+    \vskip-\topskip
+  }%
+  \nointerlineskip
+}
+%
+%    Assumption: called in vmode after the box containing the page body;
+%    thus the depth of the preceding box = depth of last line in the
+%    main text (except in the raggedbottom case).
+\def\makefootline{%
+  \relax\ifdim\prevdepth>\z@ \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \else
+    \vskip-\prevdepth \fi\fi
+  \nointerlineskip
+  \vbox to\z@{\hbox{}%
+    \baselineskip\dropfoliodepth
+    \hbox to\hsize{\hskip\z@ plus\hsize\the\footline}%
+    \vss}}
+
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -16- HYPHENATION EXCEPTIONS
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\message{hyphenation exceptions (U.S. English)}
+%      Add some common hyphenation exceptions, from TUGboat files,
+%      20-NOV-1989. For more details see TUGboat vol 10, no 3,
+%      November 1989, pp. 336--341. Many words from the TUGboat list
+%      that seemed less likely to occur in mathematical text have been
+%      omitted because hyphenation exceptions use up memory (most
+%      versions of TeX currently have a limit of 307 on hyphenation
+%      exceptions; each added hyphenation exception uses up something
+%      like 2 extra words of main memory as well).  The list of
+%      hyphenations for proper names could be expanded forever if room
+%      permitted; we restrict ourselves to a rather short, extremely
+%      arbitrary list.
+%
+%      Note: The hyphenation rules of British English differ in some
+%      particulars from the U.S. rules.
+%
+\hyphenation{acad-e-my acad-e-mies af-ter-thought anom-aly anom-alies
+an-ti-deriv-a-tive an-tin-o-my an-tin-o-mies apoth-e-o-ses
+apoth-e-o-sis ap-pen-dix ar-che-typ-al as-sign-a-ble as-sist-ant-ship
+as-ymp-tot-ic asyn-chro-nous at-trib-uted at-trib-ut-able bank-rupt
+bank-rupt-cy bi-dif-fer-en-tial blue-print busier busiest
+cat-a-stroph-ic cat-a-stroph-i-cally con-gress cross-hatched data-base
+de-fin-i-tive de-riv-a-tive dis-trib-ute dri-ver dri-vers eco-nom-ics
+econ-o-mist elit-ist equi-vari-ant ex-quis-ite ex-tra-or-di-nary
+flow-chart for-mi-da-ble forth-right friv-o-lous ge-o-des-ic
+ge-o-det-ic geo-met-ric griev-ance griev-ous griev-ous-ly
+hexa-dec-i-mal ho-lo-no-my ho-mo-thetic ideals idio-syn-crasy
+in-fin-ite-ly in-fin-i-tes-i-mal ir-rev-o-ca-ble key-stroke
+lam-en-ta-ble light-weight mal-a-prop-ism man-u-script mar-gin-al
+meta-bol-ic me-tab-o-lism meta-lan-guage me-trop-o-lis
+met-ro-pol-i-tan mi-nut-est mol-e-cule mono-chrome mono-pole
+mo-nop-oly mono-spline mo-not-o-nous mul-ti-fac-eted mul-ti-plic-able
+non-euclid-ean non-iso-mor-phic non-smooth par-a-digm par-a-bol-ic
+pa-rab-o-loid pa-ram-e-trize para-mount pen-ta-gon phe-nom-e-non
+post-script pre-am-ble pro-ce-dur-al pro-hib-i-tive pro-hib-i-tive-ly
+pseu-do-dif-fer-en-tial pseu-do-fi-nite pseu-do-nym qua-drat-ic
+quad-ra-ture qua-si-smooth qua-si-sta-tion-ary qua-si-tri-an-gu-lar
+quin-tes-sence quin-tes-sen-tial re-arrange-ment rec-tan-gle
+ret-ri-bu-tion retro-fit retro-fit-ted right-eous right-eous-ness
+ro-bot ro-bot-ics sched-ul-ing se-mes-ter semi-def-i-nite
+semi-ho-mo-thet-ic set-up se-vere-ly side-step sov-er-eign spe-cious
+spher-oid spher-oid-al star-tling star-tling-ly sta-tis-tics
+sto-chas-tic straight-est strange-ness strat-a-gem strong-hold
+sum-ma-ble symp-to-matic syn-chro-nous topo-graph-i-cal tra-vers-a-ble
+tra-ver-sal tra-ver-sals treach-ery turn-around un-at-tached
+un-err-ing-ly white-space wide-spread wing-spread wretch-ed
+wretch-ed-ly Brown-ian Eng-lish Euler-ian Feb-ru-ary Gauss-ian
+Grothen-dieck Hamil-ton-ian Her-mit-ian Jan-u-ary Japan-ese Kor-te-weg
+Le-gendre Lip-schitz Lip-schitz-ian Mar-kov-ian Noe-ther-ian
+No-vem-ber Rie-mann-ian Schwarz-schild Sep-tem-ber}
+%
+%    Initializations
+%
+%    A "style initialization" file, amsppt.sti, is loaded in, in order
+%    to use the same version of amsppt.sty for both production and
+%    distribution.
+%
+\input amsppt.sti
+%
+%    Write an empty line on screen to tidy up:
+\W@{}
+%
+%    Now we restore the catcode for @ that was in effect before this
+%    file. Note that we do not use \filename here, even though we did
+%    at the beginning of this file, because in the absence of a proper
+%    filename stack mechanism, we cannot be sure (taking into account
+%    possible future changes in the contents of amsppt.sty) that an
+%    intervening input file did not change \filename to another value.
+%
+\csname amsppt.sty\endcsname
+%
+%      And that's it.
+\endinput
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -17- NOTES
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+ Abbreviations used in this file:
+
+ From plain.tex:
+
+ \p@             1pt, dimen register
+ \z@             0pt, dimen register, can be used also as a number
+ \m@ne           -1, count register
+
+ Chardefs and mathchardefs (these control sequences can be used as
+ numbers):
+
+ \@ne            1
+ \tw@            2
+ \thr@@          3
+ \active         13
+ \sixt@@n        16
+ \@cclv          255
+ \@cclvi         256
+ \@m             1000
+ \@M             10000
+ \@MM            20000
+
+ Scratch registers:
+
+ \countdef\count@=255
+ \dimendef\dimen@=0
+ \dimendef\dimen@i=1  global only
+ \dimendef\dimen@ii=2
+ \skipdef\skip@=0
+ \toksdef\toks@=0
+
+ Other:
+
+ \m@th           sets \mathsurround=0pt
+ \z@skip         0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt, skip register
+ \hideskip       -1000pt plus 1fill, skip register
+ \centering      0pt plus 1000pt minus 1000pt, skip register
+ \voidb@x        permanently void box register
+ \endgraf        same as \par, but will be accepted in arguments where
+                   \par would cause an error.
+
+ \space          a macro whose expansion is a space token
+ \empty@          a defined macro with a null expansion
+ \null           an \hbox with null contents
+
+ From amstex.tex:
+
+ \W@             \immediate\write16
+ \eat@           gobbles next token or group in braces
+ \strip@         gets rid of trailing space from given argument
+ \hashtoks@      token register, containing #
+ \centering@     skip register, 0pt plus 1000pt
+ \rightappend@ ... \to ...       Append to a token list.
+ \space@         a space token (\let equal, not a macro like \space)
+ \relaxnext@     \let\next=\relax
+ \ex@            dimen, related to x-height, roughly equal to 1pt
+ \hexnumber@     convert hex digit from decimal form to hex equivalent
+ \font@          font assignment, like \font but modified to make
+                   syntax check work
+ \macro@@        used for stripping off the first part of the result
+                   of a \meaning command.
+
+ \def\FN@{\futurelet\next}
+ \def\DN@{\def\next@}
+ \def\DNii@{\def\nextii@}
+ \def\RIfM@{\relax\ifmmode}
+ \def\RIfMIfI@{\relax\ifmmode\ifinner}
+ \def\setboxz@h{\setbox\z@\hbox}
+ \def\wdz@{\wd\z@}
+ \def\boxz@{\box\z@}
+ \def\setbox@ne{\setbox\@ne}
+ \def\wd@ne{\wd\@ne}
+
+ More scratch registers:
+
+ \toks@@
+ \count@@
+ \count@@@
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -18- APPENDIX: NOTES ON VERSION 2.1
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+---\curraddr was added, for giving the current address of an author,
+if different from the address given in \address.
+
+---\rom was added, for preventing unwanted italicization of certain
+things such as parentheses or numbers, in theorems and other italic
+passages.  \rom automatically inserts italic corrections.
+
+---The implementation of \nofrills was completely changed, to provide
+better error messages for a missing or misspelled \endkeywords or
+similar end command, when reading a delimited argument. The error
+message is now one of
+
+  ! Forbidden control sequence found while scanning use of \keywords.
+  ! Paragraph ended before \keywords was complete.
+
+Previously the message would have had the same form, but would have
+referred to a mysterious control sequence ``\next@'' instead of
+\keywords.
+
+This change also eliminates a longstanding, very minor bug
+(\usualspace@ didn't work if it was stored in something such as
+\keywords@ for later use, because of its dependence on the
+\ifnofrills@ switch).
+
+---Multiple \thanks commands in the top matter will now produce
+multiple acknowledgment footnotes instead of discarding all but the
+last one. A period is no longer added automatically at the end of a
+\thanks.
+
+---\subjclass was updated to use the date (1991) of the current
+Mathematics Subject Classification scheme.
+
+---\widestnumber\item now works as claimed in the User's Guide.
+
+---The missing \par in \penaltyandskip@ was added.
+
+---Additional checks were added for runaway \proclaim, \definition,
+\ref, \roster, etc.  The internal macro \runaway@ was changed to make
+its usage more consistent and robust; in the process its name was
+changed to \add@missing (and as the name suggests, it now tries to
+recover by adding the  missing \end... command).
+
+---The bibliography macros were substantially modified to correct
+another longstanding bug: line breaks after explicit hyphens,
+mathbins, and mathrels were inhibited. This also involved changing the
+\ref-specific version of \nofrills.  Backward compatibility (with
+version 2.0) is not complete with respect to \nofrills in the
+bibliography macros.  This seems best, however, not only to avoid
+extra implementation difficulties, but also because the user syntax in
+version 2.0 was inferior. \nofrills now should always follow
+immediately after the name of the field to which it applies, e.g.,
+\transl\nofrills, or \paper\nofrills. Note that this is more
+consistent with the usage of \nofrills outside of the references
+section. \nofrills will cause all the "frills" such as the parentheses
+around years in journal article citations, or words like "eds." or
+"vol." that are supplied automatically, to be omitted for the given
+field.  In addition, it will suppress the automatic punctuation at the
+end of the field, if any.
+
+The macro \refdef@ is gone; instead, to define a new reference
+element, you need a definition of the form
+
+  \newbox\jourbox@
+  \def\jour{\makerefbox\jour\jourbox@{\it}}
+
+where \makerefbox is a macro with three arguments: #1 is the name of
+the calling macro (for use in error messages, if need be), #2 is the
+box in which the contents of the \jour field should be stored, and #3
+is formatting information (primarily font changes) to be inserted at
+the beginning of the box. However, as before, punctuation and words
+such as "pp.", "eds.", or "vol." that are to be inserted automatically
+are handled by \endref@.
+
+Therefore, to change such frills, or the ordering of the parts of a
+reference, you need to modify \endref@.  The macros \ppunbox@ and
+\commaunbox@ should normally be used to unpack a box, because they
+automatically take care of complications like \nofrills, closing
+quotes, or line breaks. \ppunbox@ takes four arguments:
+
+       #1: punctuation that should come before a line break or
+           closing quotes of a previous field
+       #2: other material such as "(" or "vol." that should be added
+           at the beginning of the current field
+       #3: the name of the box to be unpacked
+       #4: other material such as ")" that should be added
+           at the end of the current field
+
+For example, the command to unpack the \yr field is:
+
+       \ppunbox@\empty@{ (}\yrbox@)%
+
+Note the use of \empty@ to specify no preceding comma or other
+punctuation.
+
+\commaunbox@ is merely an abbreviation for
+
+       \ppunbox@,\space\xxxbox@\empty@
+
+The switches \ifpaperquotes@ and \ifbookquotes@ are gone.  If quotes
+are to be added around a particular part of a reference, it should be
+done in \endref@ using \ppunbox@ and \endquotes as follows:
+
+       \ppunbox@,{ ``}\xxxbox@\endquotes
+
+\endquotes does not typeset the ending quotes immediately (because we
+don't know yet whether to insert a comma or other punctuation before
+the ending quotes).  Instead, it sets a flag to be used in subsequent
+processing.
+
+---A \refstyle command was added to allow users to specify one of the
+three different reference styles most commonly used in AMS
+publications: letter labels in square brackets; unnumbered; and
+numbered (denoted A, B, and C, respectively). The syntax is
+"\refstyle{A}". Style C, numbered with arabic numerals, is the default
+selected by amsppt.sty. Eventually, phasing in the \refstyle command
+will allow the formatting for cites in the main text to be
+automatically  linked with the corresponding references in the
+bibliography. (Since the bibliography style could also affect the
+style of cites, the \refstyle command should be placed in the preamble
+of a document.) Also, eventually \key could be used for all reference
+labels, and the \no command will be unnecessary, because its current
+use is merely to indicate different formatting for the reference
+number.
+
+---\miscnote was added, and used in the implementation of \toappear,
+so that \toappear and \finalinfo would not be mutually exclusive.
+\miscnote might also be used for things like "preprint" or
+"submitted".  Unlike \finalinfo, \miscnote automatically adds
+parentheses.
+
+---\procinfo was added, to give place and date where the meeting
+took place, for proceedings volumes.
+
+---\eds or \ed information will now be used in place of an author's
+name, if \by is absent.  This would be for collections or proceedings
+volumes that are cited as a whole, instead of citing a single paper
+within the volume.
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -19- APPENDIX: NOTES ON VERSIONS 2.1a, 2.1b, ...
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Users that have amsppt.sty built into their amstex format file will
+need to rebuild their format file if they get a newer version of
+amsppt.sty.
+
+Version 2.1a:
+
+---Added a test so that amsppt.sty will give an error message if it's
+about to be loaded and a different version of amsppt.sty was preloaded
+in the format file.
+
+---Added code to compensate for a bug in version 2.1 that left
+\amsppt.sty = \endinput. Probably not necessary---unless the error
+message described above is changed in the future to just a warning
+message.
+
+---Added \loadmsam and \loadmsbm before the call to \UseAMSsymbols,
+so that amsppt.sty 2.1 will work even with an AMSTeX 2.0 format file.
+
+---Changed the definition of \magnification (from plain.tex) so that
+it won't reset the page dimensions to 6.5 by 9 true inches if
+it is used but will behave in a way that's more appropriate
+for the amsppt page dimensions.
+
+---Switched to using box 0 instead of \keybox@ for measuring a \key
+given with the \widestnumber command. This prevents a misnumbering
+problem that occurred in rare cases (e.g., an unnumbered reference
+following numbered references).
+
+---Changed erroneous \proclaimfont@ to \proclaimheadfont@ and
+\demofont@ to \remarkheadfont@ in the definition of \Monograph.  Note:
+This means that fonts used for \remark, \demo, \proclaim \definition,
+\example, were wrong for any document that used \Monograph with amsppt
+2.1; switching to amsppt version 2.1a will make the fonts correct
+according to AMS standard monograph style, but with a slight chance of
+changing line breaks.
+
+---Added \pagenumwd and put the table-of-contents definition of
+\page inside the \toc group so that it will not conflict with
+the normal definition of \page if a single document contains
+both \toc (with \widestnumber\page used) and \Refs.
+
+---Added default definition for \leftskip@ to handle rare cases.
+Added \envir@stack\endroster in \Runinitem to prevent spurious
+"missing \endroster" error every time it's used.
+
+---Change handling of \key and \no to better handle the complications
+related to \refstyle and the need to maintain backward compatibility.
+(I.e., \refstyle should automatically be reset to C if \no is used.)
+
+---Added \procpaper@false and \book@false where appropriate in \book,
+\jour, \inbook to handle (rare?) \moreref cases where the additional
+ref is not the same type as the first ref. Switched around \moreref
+and \transl, a cosmetic change but makes the code easier to
+understand. (It seems reasonable for \transl to be based on \moreref,
+but rather odd for \moreref to be based on \transl, as in version
+2.1.)
+
+---Added \ifvoid test in \makerefbox to give an error message
+if the same tag is used twice or mutually exclusive tags (e.g.,
+\book and \inbook) are used.
+
+---Added some code to print out editors and pages information
+if given even when according to AMS style it should normally
+be omitted.
+
+Version 2.1b:
+
+---Restored the old \nologo command by popular demand.
+
+---Added \linespacing command to facilitate changing line spacing
+globally: \linespacing{2.0} increases line spacing by a factor of 2,
+similarly \linespacing{1.5} or \linespacing{2.3} for arbitrary
+factors.
+
+---Italic font is now used instead of slanted throughout (for e.g.
+\proclaim).
+
+---Omitting \by in a \ref is now possible without getting unwanted
+punctuation at the very beginning after the key.
+
+---\rom now handles preceding ~, not just preceding space.
+
+---\subsubheadfont@ added to facilitate font switching.
+
+---\document does some font setup if \topmatter is omitted.
+
+---Fixed a problem with running heads and \chapter\nofrills.
+
+---Eliminated spurious error message from \roster \widestnumber inside
+a \proclaim.
+
+Version 2.1c:
+
+---Fixed a bug introduced in version 2.1b: lost punctuation and space
+at the beginning of a \moreref.
+
+
+Version 2.1d:
+
+---Minor corrections to \PSAMSFonts, documentation
+
+---Fixed \linespacing bug: the vrule inside \strutbox did not have
+zero width.
+
+Version 2.1e:
+
+---Added \MR, \AMSPPS commands
+
+---Added some code to \output@ to reset \break, \par in case output
+routine is invoked inside \ref ... \endref *and* something added by the
+output routine (e.g., journal logo on first page) uses them.
+
+Version 2.1f:
+
+---Moved MR and AMSPPS numbers after final period.
+
+---Split part of \enddocument into separate \enddocument@text for easier
+customization.
+
+Version 2.1g (January 1997 distribution):
+
+---Added code to initialize PSAMSFonts-sensitive fonts correctly regardless
+of which fonts are being used.
+
+---Moved loading of AMSFonts and symbol names to initialization block at
+end of file.
+
+---In \makeheadline, added \leftskip=\z@ to avoid indentation of journal
+logo when end of page 1/beginning of page 2 contains a roster.
+
+---Added \urladdr to other author addresses.
+
+---Added \refsheadfont@ to permit font change without redefinition.
+
+---Added \refstyle@ to permit correct initialization of indent with
+\widestnumber when \refstyle C is used.
+
+---Added \inslogo@ to \endtopmatter to drop in insert with AMS-TeX logo or
+copyright notice.
+
+---Added \preproclaimskip, \postproclaimskip, \remarkskip, \postdemoskip,
+\predefinitionskip, \postdefinitionskip to permit spacing variations without
+redefinitions.
+
+---Revamped calculation of \pageheight to derive \vsize from known dimensions.
+
+---Revamped output routine for simplicity, and to accept AMS-TeX logo /
+copyright block as a bottom insertion rather than as an element between the
+page body and the footline; this makes it possible to use a single \pageheight
+on all pages.
+
+---Redefined \pagecontents to include logo/copyright insert, \copyins.
+
+---Redefined \makeheadline to reset formatting parameters (\leftskip, etc.)
+to avoid problems if page makeup occurs in the middle of (say) a \roster,
+and to ensure that the running head is always the same height, regardless
+of the presence of accents or math.
+
+---Redefined \makefootline for similar reasons of consistency.
+
+---Moved initialization of AMSFonts to end of file.
+
+---Adjusted indentation of code to clarify structure and nesting.
+
+---Added test for the presence of a local initialization file (amsppt.sti);
+if present, input it, and if not, carry out initialization suitable for the
+use of this style by general users.
+
+Version 2.1h (January 1997 distribution):
+
+---Added a link for an initialization file, amsppt.sti; this permits easier
+tailoring of certain features (e.g. use of PSAMSFONTS, documented in the
+AMS-TeX User's Guide), as well as use in AMS production of publication-time
+local features, without requiring a separate version of amsppt.sty.
+
+---Added \Refsname to permit publication-specific initialization of variant
+references title without requiring full redefinition of \Refs.
+
+---Added \remarkfont and \definitionfont instead of \rm to allow flexibility.
+
+---Removed ninepoint; if this were to be needed, it's likely that enough
+other changes would also be needed that the result would be a different style.
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%      -20- APPENDIX: NOTES ON VERSIONS 2.2
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Version 2.2 (August 2001 distribution):
+
+---Added @ to the plain list of \dospecials, to make it behave better in
+verbatim, e-mail addresses, and URL's.
+
+---Added commands \savecat and \restorecat  to make it easy to save and
+restore the catcode value of any character, most commonly @.
+
+---Replaced explicit font for addresses by \addressfont@.
+
+---Check address fields, thanks and subject classification for presence of
+data, and omit if empty.
+
+---Added \subjclassyear to identify version of classification scheme; check
+for valid years (1991, 2000), default to 1991 for backward compatibility
+
+---Added a check for the presence of \document line; report at \enddocument
+if missing.
+
+---Documented a bug in the application of space between two adjacent theorems;
+didn't fix it (compatibility: would change page breaks).
+
+---Added \if@qedhere to support feature in AMS document styles that permits
+location of end-of-proof box to be varied.
+
+---Removed period at end of caption if it is not followed by text.
+
+---Added a warning to \footnote inside references; footnotes inside references
+disappear, taking with them the reference element to which they are attached.
+
+---Removed \foliofont@ from definition of \folio and added it instead to the
+running heads, permitting "clean" page numbers to be output with indexing
+terms when an auxiliary package such as index.tex (from texsis) is used.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsppt.faq b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsppt.faq
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0f6811d03b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amsppt.faq
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+%% @txtfile{
+%%   filename  = "amsppt.faq",
+%%   version   = "2.2",
+%%   date      = "2001/08/07",
+%%   time      = "13:53:55 EDT",
+%%   checksum  = "02733 194 1367 9268",
+%%   filetype  = "AMS-TeX: user documentation",
+%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%   copyright = "Copyright 2001 American Mathematical Society,
+%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%                authorized only if either:
+%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy
+%%                    including name; OR
+%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%                    to some other name.",
+%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%                Technical Support,
+%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%                P. O. Box 6248,
+%%                Providence, RI 02940,
+%%                USA",
+%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%   keywords  = "amstex, ams-tex, tex",
+%%   abstract  = "This file contains frequently asked questions and
+%%                answers concerning AMS-TeX, and in particular how
+%%                to cope with ``missing'' features and features of
+%%                the preprint documentstyle (amsppt) that are
+%%                specifically tailored to AMS publication style.",
+%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 checksum
+%%                as the first value, followed by the equivalent of
+%%                the standard UNIX wc (word count) utility output of
+%%                lines, words, and characters.  This is produced by
+%%                Robert Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%% }
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Frequently asked questions about AMS-TeX and amsppt.sty.
+
+  1) Why does the bottom of every page get cut off when \magnification
+     is used?
+  2) How can I prepare a two-column index for a book using AMS-TeX?
+  3) I need 12pt type in my paper.  How do I get it?
+  4) I need to put a footnote in my bibliography, but it disappears.
+     How do I get it to print out?
+  5) A page ending with a theorem is shorter than other pages.  Why?
+  6) Why am I getting a label ``E-mail address'' at the end of my paper
+     with no data?
+  7) I need diagonal arrows in my commutative diagrams.  How do I
+     get them?
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+1) Why does the bottom of every page get cut off when \magnification
+   is used?
+
+Version 2.1 of amsppt.sty was modified (in January 1997) to make the
+output dimensions the same as those for the majority of AMS publications,
+in particular journals.  This made it possible to simplify quite radically
+the AMS ``author packages'' for particular publications, thus (in the
+long run) avoiding questions that were demanding scarce support time.
+
+One of the January 1997 changes consisted in positioning the running
+head, i.e. the top of the type block, at the exact top of the normal
+print area, rather than ``above'' the print area as is the default in
+plain TeX.  Although the default setting for laser printers starts the
+printing 1in down from the top edge of the paper, on a typesetter, that
+setting is traditionally 0 (to avoid wasting the expensive photographic
+medium), and unless special measures are taken, the running heads would
+print ``above'' the top, often overprinting something else or being lost
+off the edge, resulting in even greater waste of materials and time.
+In addition, running heads ``above'' the print area could not be checked
+in the previewers used at AMS.
+
+The earlier behavior can be restored by specifying
+    \voffset-2pc
+when processing a document with amsppt.sty.  This command is present,
+but commented out, in the file amsppt.sti, a file intended for the
+specification of local defaults.  Since amsppt.sti is automatically
+read in by amsppt.sty, uncommenting the relevant command would adjust
+the position of output on paper sufficiently to accommodate magnification
+up to \magstep 1.
+
+Note that no AMS publication uses magnification as a technique for
+providing larger type; if larger type is desired, that is encoded into
+the relevant author package by providing additional fonts.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+2) How can I prepare a two-column index for a book using AMS-TeX?
+
+AMS-TeX was originally intended to provide only features to make it
+easier to typeset mathematical content -- display equations, theorems,
+and similar material.  Niceties of formatting were to be provided by
+other packages such as LaTeX.  Things didn't quite turn out that way,
+and AMS-TeX and LaTeX didn't merge as readily as was once hoped.
+
+It is still not planned to add advanced formatting features, including
+double columns, to AMS-TeX.  However, some simple macros can be defined
+and used in an AMS-TeX source file to produce an .idx file, which can
+then be processed by the makeindex program.  (Makeindex is included
+with all standard TeX distributions.)  The resulting .ind file can be
+processed separately through (AMS-)LaTeX to create a two-column index.
+
+Macros compatible with makeindex and plain TeX (and therefore AMS-TeX)
+can be found on CTAN, in the area
+    /tex-archive/macros/texsis/index/
+
+Read the documentation that comes with makeindex and the comments in
+the file index.tex for instructions.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+3) I need 12pt type in my paper.  How do I get it?
+
+This size isn't needed in most AMS publications, but when it is, it is
+defined for the author packages that need it.  In particular, \twelvepoint
+is defined in the file ams-spec.sty, which is used with monographs and
+book proceedings.  (\elevenpoint is also defined in ams-spec.sty.)
+
+The file amsspec.sty can be obtained as part of the gen-m (generic book)
+author package from the AMS web server:
+    http://www.ams.org/tex/author-info.html
+
+Create a file called myfonts.tex.  Begin that file with the line
+    \savecat @
+and end it with the line
+    \restorecat @
+Copy the definition of \twelvepoint and all associated \font@ commands
+from amsspec.sty into myfonts.tex.  Then include the command
+    \input myfonts
+in the preamble of your document file.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+4) I need to put a footnote in my bibliography, but it disappears.
+   How do I get it to print out?
+
+Not only the footnote disappears, but also the element of the reference
+to which the footnote is attached.  This happens because the parts of
+the footnote are boxed during processing, and footnotes disappear from
+boxed material.  The solution is to use \footnotemark in the reference,
+and \footnotetext{...} after \endref.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+5) A page ending with a theorem is shorter than other pages.  Why?
+
+If a page break occurs between two theorems, or between any combination
+of adjacent theorem or proof (\proclaim or \demo), the space following
+the first one will fall before a favorable penalty and will not be
+removed at the bottom of the page.  This is due to a bug, in which the
+vertical space preceding a theorem or proof will be removed only if it
+is less than the space to be added  In AMS style, the space above is
+the same as the space below, so what should have been done is test for
+a space less than or equal to the space to be added; however, to change
+this now could cause changes in the paging of existing documents.
+
+In order to get rid of the extra space, put \pagebreak immediately
+before the \endproclaim or \enddemo at the bottom of the page; this
+should, of course, be done only for the final run.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+  6) Why am I getting a label ``E-mail address'' at the end of my paper
+     with no data?
+
+In the topmatter templates for AMS author packages, all possible tags
+for subject and author information are included for convenience.  If
+any of these are left in your file with no data, ``empty'' footnotes
+can appear on the first page (for \subjclass or \keywords), or labels
+associated with author addresses can appear at the end of a paper with
+no data.  Checking for ``empty'' tags isn't easily accomplished, so an
+author should make sure that any tag that doesn't have data is removed
+or commented out.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+  7) I need diagonal arrows in my commutative diagrams.  How do I
+     get them?
+
+The \CD structure of AMS-TeX provides only vertical and horizontal
+connectors.  To get diagonal connectors, it is necessary to use another
+package.  XY-pic, by Kristoffer Rose, provides many more facilities
+than \CD, and it is compatible with AMS-TeX.  XY-pic can be found on
+CTAN, in the area
+    /tex-archive/macros/generic/diagrams/xypic/
+Be sure to read the excellent documentation, xyguide, which is available
+in dvi, PostScript and PDF form, ready to print.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amstinst.ps.gz b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amstinst.ps.gz
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0b1475b7f8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amstinst.ps.gz
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amstinst.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amstinst.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ec021e23d43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/amstinst.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,415 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @TeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "amstinst.tex",
+%%%   version   = "2.2",
+%%%   date      = "2001/08/09",
+%%%   time      = "18:47:33 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "30594 415 2485 18444",
+%%%   filetype  = "AMS-TeX: user documentation",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 2001 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                    including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                    to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                P. O. Box 6248,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02940,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable  = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   keywords  = "amstex, ams-tex",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   abstract  = "This file is part of the AMS-TeX distribution,
+%%%                version 2.2. It contains installation instructions.
+%%%                The file amsguide.tex inputs this file, but this
+%%%                file is also designed so that it can be processed
+%%%                separately, using only Plain TeX.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 checksum
+%%%                as the first value, followed by the equivalent of
+%%%                the standard UNIX wc (word count) utility output of
+%%%                lines, words, and characters.  This is produced by
+%%%                Robert Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+%    This file is input by amsguide.tex, which requires AMS-TeX 2.1 or
+%    later.  However it can also be typeset separately using Plain \TeX{},
+%    means of the mechanism below: we check to see if amsppt.sty has
+%    been loaded earlier; if so, we set the catcode of the ~ character
+%    to 14 so that the following section of definitions will be ignored
+%    (since the definitions would be redundant); otherwise we set the
+%    catcode to 9 ("ignore") so that the definitions will be carried out.
+%    Several definitions differ from the ones in amsguide.tex because
+%    amsppt.sty is absent.
+%
+%    Enclosing the definitions section within the initial \if ...
+%    \else ... \fi would be problematic because of the outerness of
+%    \head and \subhead in the amsppt documentstyle.
+%
+%    Leave the definition of \head active; it is slightly different from
+%    the one in amsppt.sty, and gives a different result in Appendix C.
+%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname amsppt.sty\endcsname\relax
+  \catcode`\~=9 \else \catcode`\~=14 \let\BYE\relax \fi
+~  \let\BYE\bye
+~  \hsize=30pc \vsize=47pc
+  \def\head#1\endhead{\bigskip{\sc\noindent
+    \leftskip0pt plus.5\hsize \rightskip=\leftskip\parfillskip=0pt
+    \def\\{\break}#1\par}\nobreak\smallskip}
+  \font\sc=cmcsc10
+~  \def\subhead#1\endsubhead{\removelastskip\medskip{\bf\noindent
+~    #1\par}\nobreak\smallskip}
+~  \def\AmSTeX{{\the\textfont2 A\kern-.1667em%
+~    \lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}-\TeX\spacefactor 1000 }
+~  \long\def\usertype#1{\smallskip
+~    \moveright2pc\vbox{\def\par{\crcr}\halign{%
+~      \setbox0\hbox{\tt##}%
+~      \hbox\ifdim\wd0<10pc to10pc\fi{\unhbox0\hfil}%
+~      \kern1pc \it $\langle$return$\rangle$\hss
+~      \cr#1\crcr}}%
+~    \smallskip}
+~  \def\<#1>{{\it$\langle$#1\/$\rangle$}}
+~  \hfuzz1pc % to suppress reporting of overfull boxes.
+~  \hyphenation{amsppt}
+~  \def\Textures{{\it Textures\/}}
+~  \def\AMS{American Mathematical Society}
+~  \def\filnam#1{{\tt\def\\{\char`\\}\ignorespaces#1\unskip}}
+~  \hyphenchar\tentt=-1 % to prohibit hyphenation in tt text
+~  \newdimen\exindent   \exindent=2\parindent
+~  {\obeylines
+~   \gdef^^M{\par\penalty9999}%
+~   \gdef\beginexample#1{\medskip\bgroup %
+~     \def\~{\char`\~}\def\\{\char`\\}\def\{{\char`\{}\def\}{\char`\}}%
+~     \overfullrule0pt\tt\frenchspacing %
+~     \parindent=0pt#1\leftskip=\exindent\obeylines}
+~  }%  end \obeylines
+~  \def\endexample{\endgraf\egroup\medskip}
+~  \def\cs#1{\leavevmode
+~    \skip0\lastskip\unskip\penalty0
+~    \ifdim\skip0>0pt \hskip\skip0\fi
+~    {\tt\def\{{\char`\{}\def\}{\char`\}}%
+~      \def\\{\char`\\}\char`\\\ignorespaces#1\unskip}}
+~  \newcount\rostercount
+~  \def\roster{\par\smallskip\begingroup \rostercount=0
+~    \def\par{{\endgraf}}\hangindent3pc
+~    \def\item{\futurelet\next\iitem}%
+~    \def\iitem{\ifx\next"\expandafter\iiitem
+~      \else\advance\rostercount 1 \iiitem"(\the\rostercount)"\fi}%
+~    \def\iiitem"##1"{\par \noindent\hbox to\hangindent{\hss##1\enspace}}%
+~  }
+~  \def\endroster{\par\smallskip\endgroup}
+~  \def\newpage{\vfil\eject}
+\catcode126=\active % restore ~ to normal; using `\~ here wouldn't work!
+\def\TEXMF{{\tt TEXMF}}
+
+\head Appendix B\\ Installation Procedures\endhead
+
+\subhead B.1. Introduction\endsubhead
+
+The \AmSTeX{} software can be used with any implementation of \TeX{}\null.
+Many \TeX{} distributions include \AmSTeX{}, ready to run; check the
+documentation that came with the \TeX{} distribution you are using.
+When a new version of \AmSTeX{} is released, all distributors are
+notified, so if your \TeX{} system is up to date, it is likely that you
+don't need to do anything at all.
+
+Most up-to-date \TeX{} installations are organized according to the
+\TeX{} Directory Structure (TDS)\null.  This is a tree structure whose
+root is identified as something like {\tt /usr/local/share/texmf} or
+{\tt c:\char`\\sw\char`\\texmf}.  In the following instructions,
+we will use the name \TEXMF{} to identify the root directory of a
+TDS or similar structure.
+
+When installing a new release of \AmSTeX{}, you may want to first
+back up your old version, if you have existing documents that use it.
+Although new releases are intended to be backward compatible, a backup
+provides insurance in case something goes wrong.
+
+
+\subhead B.2. Location of \AmSTeX{} Files in a TDS Tree\endsubhead
+
+Files in the \AmSTeX{} distribution fall into four categories:
+files for use with \TeX{}, source files, documentation, and formats.
+The following list shows all the files in the current distribution,
+along with their recommended locations in a TDS tree.
+
+\medskip
+\begingroup
+\obeylines\obeyspaces\tt%
+TEXMF/
+\  tex/amstex/base/
+\    amstex.tex
+\    amstex.ini
+\    amsppt.sty
+\    amsppt.sti
+\    amsppt1.tex
+\  tex/plain/amsfonts/
+\    amssym.def
+\    amssym.tex
+\  source/amstex/
+\    README
+\    amsppt.doc
+\    amstex.bug
+\  doc/ams/amstex/
+\    amsguide.tex
+\    amsguide.ps
+\    amsppt.faq
+\    amstinst.tex
+\    amstinst.ps
+\    joyerr.tex
+\    joyerr2.tex
+\  \<\TeX-implementation>/formats/
+\    amstex.fmt
+\endgroup
+
+\medskip
+\noindent
+The \AmSTeX{} distribution can be retrieved in bundled form from the
+AMS web site, e.g., as a \filnam{.zip} or \filnam{.tar} file.  In this
+form, the files are already arranged according to the TDS structure.
+(The format file is not included in the distribution.  It is
+platform-specific, and must be created as part of the installation;
+see below.)  To install the collection from a TDS-formatted bundle,
+place the bundled file into a convenient directory and unpack it using
+the \TEXMF{} directory as the ``Extract to'' target.  Some examples:
+
+\halign{\quad#\hfil\quad & #\hfil \cr
+ WinZip: & Click on ``Extract'' and then in the ``Extract to'' box, enter\cr
+         & {\tt\char`\\sw\char`\\texmf}\quad (or whatever TEXMF is on your
+           system)\cr
+ gzip:   & {\tt gzip -dc amstex.tgz \char`\|\ (cd TEXMF; tar xvf -)}\cr
+ unzip:  & {\tt unzip amstex2.zip -d TEXMF}\cr
+}
+
+\noindent
+The bundled file may be deleted after unpacking.
+
+If the files are obtained from CTAN (where they are mirrored from
+the AMS server), they are not in TDS order.  Use the above list to
+place the files into the proper location.
+
+Note: If you currently have any of the following files from very old
+releases of \AmSTeX{}, delete them before installing the new release.
+They are either irrelevant or superseded in the new version of \AmSTeX{},
+and it is best to remove them to avoid confusion.  If you back up your
+existing \AmSTeX{} files before installing the new version, these files
+should be included.
+
+\settabs4\columns {\tt
+\+\ \ amsfil.chg& amsplain.tex& amsppt.mor& amstex.chg\cr
+\+\ \ cyracc.def& cyrmemo.def& cyrmemo.tex& amsplain.fmt\cr
+}
+
+\medskip
+The TFM files for some of AMSFonts 2.2 (\filnam{msam*}, \filnam{msbm*},
+and \filnam{eufm*}) are needed to run \AmSTeX{} with the AMSPPT
+document style, even if you don't plan to actually print anything using the
+AMSFonts.  (These fonts {\it are} needed to process and print the User's
+Guide of which this appendix is a part.)  TFM files are available from the
+AMS web site, \filnam{www.ams.org/tex/amsfonts.html}, or by anonymous FTP
+from \filnam{ftp.ams.org}.  They should be placed in the directory
+\filnam{TEXMF/fonts/tfm/ams/}.
+
+
+\subhead B.3. What if Your \TeX{} System Isn't in a TDS Tree?\endsubhead
+
+If your \TeX{} system is arranged in some other way, you must consult
+the user documentation for guidance.  The hints that follow are just
+that---hints.  If your \TeX{} system documentation recommends something
+different, you should follow that procedure.
+
+We recommend placing \AmSTeX{} files into distinct subdirectories or
+folders, to simplify installation of future versions.
+
+First, determine where \TeX{} will look for files to be input.  If
+\filnam{amstex.tex} and \filnam{amssym.def} are already present, place
+the files listed in section B.2 under {\tt tex/amstex/base/} and
+{\tt tex/plain/amsfonts/} into those same areas.  If neither of these
+files is already present, look for the file \filnam{plain.tex}.
+Create appropriate subdirectories under the area where you find this
+file for the new \AmSTeX{} files.
+
+If there isn't any obvious place to put source or documentation files
+(the ones listed in section B.2 under {\tt source/amstex/} and
+{\tt doc/ams/amstex/}), you can put them in with the input files.
+Consult the documentation for your \TeX{} distribution.
+
+Once all the files are installed, you are ready to create a format
+file.
+
+
+\subhead B.4. Creating a Format File\endsubhead
+
+Every implementation of \TeX{} uses format files to preload the macros,
+fonts, and hyphenation patterns that define basic user environments
+such as \AmSTeX.  Although it is not strictly necessary to use a
+format file for \AmSTeX, preloading will save startup time, especially
+on slower systems.  Note: Each format file takes up 150K--300K of
+disk space (depending on your \TeX{} implementation).
+
+If your \TeX{} system already includes the format file \filnam{amstex.fmt},
+you may not have to create a new one; recent changes to \filnam{amstex.tex}
+are cosmetic, and will not affect any math formatting features.
+If the AMSPPT preprint style has been included in the format, then a new
+format file is in order.  (We recommend using the name \filnam{amsppt.fmt}
+for a format file with AMSPPT preloaded so that there is no question which
+is present; see below.)
+
+Creating a format file (also known as ``initialization'') requires a
+special version of \TeX, a particular switch, or item in a menu.
+Read the documentation for your \TeX{} distribution to learn how to
+create a format file.
+
+Before creating your format file, you will want to consider whether you
+habitually use the AMSPPT document style.  If you use other document styles
+rarely or never, then you would benefit from the use of a format file with
+\filnam{amsppt.sty} preloaded.  If you are likely to use other document styles
+periodically, then you probably do not want to preload \filnam{amsppt.sty}.
+To make a simple \AmSTeX{} format file, proceed with the next paragraph.
+To make a format file with \filnam{amsppt.sty} preloaded, edit the file
+\filnam{amstex.ini} and remove the percent sign (comment character) at the
+beginning of the line {\tt\char`\%}\cs{documentstyle\{amsppt\}}, just before
+the \cs{dump} command.  Save this file with the name \filnam{amsppt.ini}.
+
+If you intend to use Type~1 outline versions of AMSFonts, read Appendix~C
+before proceeding.  Users of \Textures{} will have to comment out one more
+\cs{input} statement; read the instructions.
+
+Update the file name database (if one is used) so that \TeX{} will be able
+to find \filnam{amstex.ini} (or \filnam{amsppt.ini}) and the other files.
+This may be done by a command such as {\tt texhash} or via a menu option.
+Consult the documentation for your \TeX{} distribution for instructions
+on how to perform this update.
+
+Now run the ``initialization'' version of \TeX{} on \filnam{amstex.ini}
+(or \filnam{amsppt.ini}).  This will create an \AmSTeX{} format file named
+\filnam{amstex.fmt} (or \filnam{amsppt.fmt}).  Some implementations of
+\TeX{} will automatically place the format file in the proper directory;
+otherwise you should move this file manually into the \TeX{} formats
+directory.  Once again update the file name database to make the format
+file visible to \TeX{}.
+
+
+\subhead B.5. Using \AmSTeX{} 2.0+\endsubhead
+
+With some \TeX{} implementations, a format file can be specified by preceding
+its name with an ampersand:
+
+\usertype{tex \&amstex filename}
+
+Other implementations treat the name of the format file as a command:
+
+\usertype{amstex filename}
+
+Still other implementations allow the installation of this name as a
+menu option.  For details of how to use format files with your
+implementation of \TeX{}, see your documentation.
+
+
+\subhead B.5. Getting a printed copy of the User's Guide \endsubhead
+
+The \AmSTeX{} User's Guide can be obtained as a PDF file from the AMS
+web site.  It is also included in the distribution as a PostScript file,
+ready to print (\filnam{amsguide.ps}).  Or, you can use your newly
+created \AmSTeX{} or AMSPPT format file to typeset the file
+\filnam{amsguide.tex}; even if you print out this guide from another
+source, we recommend using the file \filnam{amsguide.tex} as a test
+to make sure that your newly installed \AmSTeX{} is working properly.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+\csname firstpage\string @true\endcsname
+
+\head Appendix C\\ Before Installing \AmSTeX: Facts About Fonts\endhead
+
+\subhead C.1. Using AMSFonts in PostScript Type~1 Form\endsubhead
+
+The AMSFonts Version~2.2 have been converted to PostScript Type~1 outlines
+in two forms:
+
+The AMS web site ({\tt www.ams.org/tex/type1-fonts.html}) holds the
+canonical distribution.  This is a collection containing all the
+typefaces, but only in 5, 7, and 10 point sizes; other sizes must be created
+by scaling.  The \AmSTeX{} preprint style provides a way for authors to
+indicate that fonts should be loaded under this alternative scaling
+convention.  If you are using this version of AMSFonts, insert the line
+\cs{PSAMSFonts} in the preamble of your file, before the \cs{topmatter}
+line; see section C.3, below, for instructions on making this your local
+default.
+
+Basil Malyshev has created a collection, called BaKoMa, containing the
+Computer Modern fonts as well as all sizes of the AMSFonts used in
+mathematics, but excluding the \filnam{wncy*} cyrillic fonts.  The BaKoMa
+fonts can be used with no special action; however, for papers or monographs
+to be published by the AMS, \cs{PSAMSFonts} should be specified.
+
+
+\subhead C.2. Using AMS Symbol Fonts\endsubhead
+
+The preprint style automatically loads the Fraktur font (\filnam{eufm}) and
+both fonts of extra symbols (\filnam{msam} and \filnam{msbm}), as well as
+all the symbol names, as described in the sections {\bf Fonts} and
+{\bf Symbol Names}.  If these will not be used, and you want a version of
+\filnam{amsppt.sty} that requires less memory than the default version, you
+can suppress the loading of these resources.  If \filnam{amsppt.sty} is to
+be included in your format file, you must make this change before creating
+the format file.  See the next section for instructions.
+
+\subhead C.3 Setting Local Default Options\endsubhead
+
+An ``initialization file'', \filnam{amsppt.sti}, contains settings for
+some options that a user may wish to change locally.  This file is read
+in automatically by \filnam{amsppt.sty}.
+
+Two lines in \filnam{amsppt.sti} affect the inclusion of AMS symbol fonts:
+\beginexample{}
+\\loadeufm \\loadmsam \\loadmsbm
+\\message\{symbol names\}\\UseAMSsymbols\\message\{,\}
+\endexample
+\noindent
+To use \filnam{amsppt.sty} without AMSFonts, comment out both lines (place
+a {\tt\char`\%} at the beginning of each line); to disable just the symbol
+names, comment out the second line.  In either case, remove the {\tt\char`\%}
+sign from the beginning of the line
+\beginexample{}
+\%\\define\\square\{\\vrule width.6em height.5em depth.1em\\relax\}
+\endexample
+\noindent
+This is required for using \cs{qed} to indicate end of proof.
+Extra math symbols can be loaded on demand with \cs{newsymbol} or by
+including \cs{UseAMSsymbols} in the preamble of a particular document.
+
+In order to make the Type~1 versions of the AMSFonts as distributed from
+the AMS web site your local default, activate the line
+\beginexample{}
+\%\\PSAMSFonts
+\endexample
+\noindent
+by removing the {\tt\char`\%} sign from the beginning of the line.
+
+
+\BYE % This is = \relax if this file is input by amsguide.tex
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/joyerr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/joyerr.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4a8771aafe5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/joyerr.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,512 @@
+%% @texfile{
+%%     filename="joyerr.tex",
+%%     version="2.1",
+%%     date="8-MAY-1991",
+%%     filetype="AMS-TeX: user documentation",
+%%     copyright="Copyright (C) American Mathematical Society,
+%%            all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%            authorized only if either:
+%%            (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy
+%%                including name; OR
+%%            (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it to some
+%%                other name.",
+%%     author="American Mathematical Society",
+%%     address="American Mathematical Society,
+%%            Technical Support Department,
+%%            P. O. Box 6248,
+%%            Providence, RI 02940,
+%%            USA",
+%%     telephone="401-455-4080 or (in the USA) 800-321-4AMS",
+%%     email="Internet: Tech-Support@Math.AMS.org",
+%%     codetable="ISO/ASCII",
+%%     checksumtype="line count",
+%%     checksum="512",
+%%     keywords="amstex, ams-tex, tex",
+%%     abstract="This file contains errata to The Joy of TeX, 
+%%            1986 edition. It must be run with AMSTEX and AMSPPT
+%%            2.0+; it is incompatible with previous versions.
+%%            It also requires the file AMSSYM.TEX and the fonts
+%%            MSAM10 and MSBM10."
+%%     }
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\input amstex
+\documentstyle{amsppt}
+
+\define\lastupdate{15 October 89}
+
+\pagewidth{29pc}
+\raggedbottom
+\tenpoint
+
+\def\JoT{{\sl The Joy of \TeX}}
+
+%  Support verbatim listing of TeX source, as defined in TeXbook, p. 421;
+%  lifted from MANMAC.TEX, and modified slightly for narrower columns.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\chardef\other=12
+\def\ttverbatim{\begingroup \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other \catcode`\#=\other \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \obeyspaces \obeylines \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tt}
+
+\newskip\ttglue
+{\tenpoint\tt \global\ttglue=.5em plus .25em minus .15em}
+% this should be installed in each font
+
+%  From David Eppstein's ``Trees'' paper (TUGboat 6#1), preserve initial
+%  spaces.
+{\obeyspaces\gdef {\ifvmode\indent\fi\space}}
+
+%  Permissible overhang beyond right margin.
+\newdimen\ttrightskip
+\ttrightskip=5pc
+   
+%  Although | is ordinarily an escape character within verbatim mode,
+%  provide a method for letting it instead be the character itself
+%  within a display verbatim listing, as needed; this is based on
+%  a technique developed by Michael Ferguson.  Note that within one
+%  \begintt...\endtt block, | can be only one of:
+%       the printing | character, or
+%       active (the escape character)
+%  It cannot perform both functions at the same time.
+\newif\ifttVertChar     \ttVertCharfalse
+{\catcode`\|=\active \gdef\VertChar{\def|{\char"7C }}}
+
+%  Other non-tt elements that may be embedded within \begintt...\endtt .
+\def\MTH{$}
+\def\sb{_}
+\def\sp{^}
+\def\SP{{\tt\char"20 }}         % "visible" space
+\chardef\bs=`\\
+\def\vrt{{\tt\char`\|}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+{\obeylines \gdef\activatettbar{\global\catcode`\|=\active %
+  \gdef|{\ttverbatim \spaceskip\ttglue \xspaceskip\ttglue %
+         \let^^M=\  \let|=\endgroup}}}
+\activatettbar
+
+\catcode`\@=13
+
+\def\ttindent{\noindent\kern3\parindent\hangindent3\parindent}
+
+%  This definition is stolen from the file of TeXbook errata.
+\def\bugonpage#1(#2) \par{\bigbreak\tenpoint
+  \hrule width\hsize
+  \line{\lower3.5pt\vbox to13pt{}Page #1\hfil(#2)}\hrule width\hsize
+  \nobreak\medskip}
+
+%  Some definitions for setting particular Joy notation.
+\def\CR{$\langle$carriage-return$\rangle$}
+\def\tab{{\smc tab}}
+
+\NoBlackBoxes
+
+\topmatter
+\title Errata to \JoT{} prior to \AmSTeX{} 2.0\endtitle
+\endtopmatter
+
+\document
+
+\noindent
+This list of corrections to \JoT, 1986 edition, includes all known
+corrections that preceded the release of \AmSTeX{} Version 2.0.
+Reprints with corrections may already incorporate some or all of
+these changes.
+
+The printing date of each copy of \JoT\ is identified on the reverse
+of the title page.  The list below will permit you to determine
+which corrections have not already been incorporated in your copy of \JoT.
+
+\smallskip
+\halign{\kern 30pt #\hfil\qquad&#\hfil\cr
+First printing, 1986 & all changes\cr
+Second printing with corrections, 1986 & changes after 11/25/86\cr
+Third printing with corrections, 1987 & changes after 5/12/87\cr}
+\smallskip
+
+For differences between earlier versions of \AmSTeX{} and Version 2.0,
+see the {\bf User's Guide to \AmSTeX{} 2.0}.
+The second edition of \JoT{}, 1990, contains all changes in this list
+as well as new material for \AmSTeX{} 2.0.
+
+(This errata list was last updated \lastupdate.)
+
+
+\bugonpage 12, line 12 (11/11/86)
+
+\noindent
+What output is produced by |\$\|\SP|\|\SP|1.00| and by |\$|\SP|\|\SP|1.00|?
+
+\bugonpage 22, line 28 (11/24/86)
+
+\line{will be some surprises in it---so you should go pick it up
+as soon as possible.\hfil}
+
+\bugonpage 26, line 9 (10/15/89)
+
+\line{uptight when you encounter an error message, because
+\TeX\ can always be coaxed}
+
+\bugonpage 39, line 4 (10/15/89)
+
+\line{words as evenly as possible.  But everyone knows that such
+bland perfection isn't}
+
+\bugonpage 39, line $-4$ (12/12/89)
+
+\line{allowed here also, to accommodate threesomes, foursomes, and
+even more perverse}
+
+\bugonpage 44, line $-10$ (12/12/89)
+
+\line{their own papers might prefer to leave these details to someone
+else, and even}
+
+\bugonpage 81, line 13 (10/25/89)
+
+\line{But don't use |\,| before an expression like $\dsize \frac{dy}{dx}$
+or before the $dx$ in $dy/dx$.}
+
+\bugonpage 88, line $-5$ (5/11/87)
+
+\centerline{\indent We derive the quadratic formula by
+``completing the square'':}
+
+\bugonpage 90, line $-4$ (10/15/89)
+
+\line{to the old style that they may be discomforted by the
+``improvements''.\hfil}
+
+\bugonpage 99, lines 15--16 (8/6/86)
+
+{\baselineskip 18pt
+\ttindent
+|$\varinjlim$                           |$\varinjlim$\newline
+|$\varprojlim$                          |$\varprojlim$\endgraf
+}%      end extra \baselineskip
+
+\bugonpage 108, line 11 (11/11/86)
+
+\ttindent
+|  &=(a+b)(a+b)^n=(a+b)|
+
+\bugonpage 109, line 6 (12/12/89)
+
+\line{when tags are set on the right.  What input do you think you
+should use?\hfill}
+
+\bugonpage 109, line $-14$ (10/15/89)
+
+\line{so that the |=\bigl[| is aligned with the invisible |\qquad|.
+Notice, again, that such}
+
+\bugonpage 113, line 1 (4/10/86)
+
+\line{And there's |\bmatrix...\endbmatrix| to get brackets
+  |\left[...\right]| around}
+
+\bugonpage 127, line 11 (7/13/87)
+
+\line{\indent If you're an experienced mathematical typist you've
+probably already begun to}
+
+\bugonpage 129, lines 14--15 (10/15/89)
+
+\def\vector#1#2{(#1_1,\dots,#1_{#2})}
+\begingroup
+\hyphenpenalty=10000
+\noindent
+with things like $\vector xm$,
+$\vector y{n+1}$ as well.  Explain how to define |\vector| so that we can
+type these as |$\vector xm$| and |$\vector y{n+1}$|.
+
+\endgroup
+
+\bugonpage 129, last 3 lines (10/15/89)
+
+\noindent
+In Exercise 19.20 we defined |\vector| so that
+|$\vector xn$| produces $\vector xn$, etc.  But perhaps you don't like this, 
+perhaps you'd prefer to type |$\vector nx$|, with the `|n|'
+first, and the `|x|' second.  How can you arrange this?
+
+\bugonpage 131, lines 10--11 (10/15/89)
+
+\begingroup
+\noindent
+How would you |\define| the control sequence |\vector| so that
+you type |$\vector x,n.$| to get $\vector xn$, and |$\vector y,m+1.$| to get
+$\vector y{m+1}$, etc.
+
+\endgroup
+
+\bugonpage 144, line 16 (10/15/89)
+
+\line{\indent This command is ``global''---it affects everything
+that follows, even if it is in-}
+
+\bugonpage 162, line $-6$ (5/11/87)
+
+\line{if you typed |\footnote""{...}| then you  would get no marker
+at all, just a note}
+
+\bugonpage 171, line $-7$ (10/15/89)
+
+\line{too much, and only |\linebreak| will force \TeX\ to overcome
+its reluctance.\hfil}
+
+\bugonpage 176, line 4 (12/12/89)
+
+\line{about it, and an |&| is tolerated only in special situations.
+So you should remember}
+
+%  This feature has been reinstated in AMS-TeX 2.0.
+%\bugonpage 178, PAGE NUMBERS (11/14/86)
+%
+%Warning: |\nopagenumbers| does not at present work as advertised
+%with the |amsppt| style.  Consequently, this paragraph has been
+%deleted.
+
+%\bugonpage 178, between lines $-5$ and $-6$ (10/15/89)
+%
+%\line{\bf PAGE NUMBERS\hfil}
+%\vskip 2pt
+%\noindent If you are using the |amsppt| style and you type
+%|\nopagenumbers| at the beginning of the document (after the
+%|\documentstyle| line), the page numbers at the bottom of the page
+%will disappear.  Other styles probably will ignore |\nopagenumbers|.
+
+\bugonpage 179, line 4 (10/15/89)
+
+\line{change its position on the 8$\frac12$ by 11 sheet of paper.
+Typing\hfil}
+
+\bugonpage 180, lines 5--6 (10/15/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|   &=f'(x) = \frac1{2\sqrt x}\qquad|\newline
+|    \foldedtext\foldedwidth{2in}{for some $x$ in $(k, k+1)$,|
+
+\bugonpage 181, line $-$4 (10/15/89)
+
+\line{should be included at the end of that displayed formula.\hfil}
+
+\bugonpage 182, line $-2$ (12/12/89)
+
+\line{argument'' feature of |\roster| (again compare with
+{\bf footnote}).  If you type}
+
+\bugonpage 186, line 13 (10/15/89)
+
+\line{commands are ``global''---they affect everything
+that follows even if used in a group}
+
+\bugonpage 189, line 21 (12/12/89)
+
+\line{will first be divided into lines of a certain length
+(3 inches less than the width}
+
+\bugonpage 195, lines 4, 11 (7/13/87)
+
+Change\qquad ``In addition to''\qquad to\qquad ``First we have''.
+
+\bugonpage 195, line $-1$ (12/12/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|... in a bibliography''.|
+
+\bugonpage 202, line $-6$ (12/12/89)
+
+\line{If `|etc.|' were typed instead of `|etc\.|' there would be a
+larger space after the}
+
+\bugonpage 208, line 12 (12/12/89)
+
+\line{it does in ordinary text.\hfil}
+
+\bugonpage 210, line 4 (12/12/89)
+
+\line{you'll get the two equations $a+b=c$ and $A+B=C$ displayed
+separately.}
+
+\bugonpage 212, line 6 (12/12/89)
+
+\line{If you press \CR, \TeX\ will continue merrily, and you will get
+$a^b{}^c$}
+
+\bugonpage 218, line $-6$ (7/13/87)
+
+\line{Of course, you weren't supposed to anticipate such after-the-fact
+corrections.\hfil}
+
+\bugonpage 222, answer to {\bf 14.11}, line 1 (10/15/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|We derive the quadratic formula by|
+
+\bugonpage 229, answer to {\bf 15.19}, lines 2--3 (10/15/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|$\operatorname{\text{\sl SO}}(n)$       |%
+        $\operatorname{\text{\sl SO}}(n)$\newline
+|$\operatorname{\text{\bf SO}}(n)$       |%
+        $\operatorname{\text{\bf SO}}(n)$
+
+\bugonpage 230, answer to {\bf 16.3}, lines 6--9 (10/25/89)
+
+\noindent
+to suppress any extra space that \TeX\ might put in.  (Actually,
+|...\tag{$**$}$$| happens to work correctly, but |...\tag{$***$}$$|
+would give the tag ($***$); rather than worrying about why this
+happens, just type |...\tag{${*}{*}$}$$|\linebreak
+and |...\tag{${*}{*}{*}$}$$| to be on the safe side.)
+
+\bugonpage 230, answer to {\bf 16.4}, line 3 (7/13/87)
+
+\ttindent
+|Q^l&=Q_1\biggl\{\sum_k(-1)^k(PQ_1-I)^k\biggr\}|
+
+\bugonpage 230, answer to {\bf 16.4}, line 6 (10/25/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|    Q_1\tag 1{${}_r$}|
+
+\bugonpage 231, answer to {\bf 16.6} (10/25/89)
+
+\noindent Line 2:
+
+\ttindent
+|\align \alpha_4&=\sqrt{\dfrac12}\\|
+
+\noindent Line 6:
+
+\ttindent
+|\text{etc.}|
+
+\bugonpage 233, answer to {\bf 17.4}, line 6 (5/13/86)
+
+\ttindent
+|        \dots, $b_{3k}$.}\endmultline|
+
+\bugonpage 234, answer to {\bf 18.4} (5/13/86)
+
+\noindent Line 6:
+
+\ttindent
+|\pmatrix \format\r&\quad\r\\|
+
+\noindent Line 10:
+
+\ttindent
+|=\pmatrix \format\r&\quad\r\\|
+
+\bugonpage 239, answer to {\bf 19.13} (10/15/89)
+
+\gdef\vector#1{(#1_1,\dots,#1_n)}%
+\ttindent
+|\define\vector#1{(#1_1,\dots,#1_n)}|
+\medskip
+\noindent
+and then use |$\vector x| to get $\vector x$ and |$\vector y$| to get
+$\vector y$, etc.
+
+\bugonpage 240, answer to {\bf 19.14} (10/15/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|$\vector\alpha$| and |$\vector{x'}$|.
+
+\bugonpage 240, answer to {\bf 19.15} (10/15/89)
+
+\noindent{\bf 19.15.}
+You can get $\vector{{x'}}$ by typing |$\vector{{x'}}$|; now the argument is
+|{x'}| and |{x'}_1| gives ${x'}_1$, etc.  On the other hand,
+ you can't get the formula $(x_1{}',\dots,x_n{}')$ using |\vector|---you'd
+just have to type it out in full.
+
+\bugonpage 240, answer to {\bf 19.20} (10/15/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|\define\vector#1#2{(#1_1,\dots,#1_{#2})}|
+
+\bugonpage 242, answer to {\bf 19.23} (10/15/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|\define\vector#1#2{(#2_1,\dots,#2_{#1})}|
+\medskip
+\noindent
+Although |#1| and |#2| must appear in that order after the 
+|\define\vector|, they can appear in any order within
+the definition itself.
+
+\bugonpage 242, answer to {\bf 19.24} (10/15/89)
+
+\ttindent
+|\define\vector#1,#2.{(#1_1,\dots,#1_{#2})}|
+
+\bugonpage 242, answer to {\bf 19.27}, line 1 (7/13/87) % Francis O. McGuinness
+
+\line{{\bf 19.27.} This is a perfectly acceptable |\define|, but you are
+{\sl not\/} defining a new}
+
+\bugonpage 251, line 1 (10/25/89)
+
+\line{is supplied as a synonym for |\thickspace|. In |plain|, the thick
+space |\;| can}
+
+\bugonpage 252, line 6 (11/11/86)
+
+\ttindent
+|$f''^2$|
+
+\bugonpage 261, after line 12 (6/22/87)
+
+Add\qquad $\eqsim$\quad|\eqsim|
+
+\bugonpage 261, line 15 (6/22/87)
+
+Change\qquad $\ncong$\quad|\napprox|\qquad to\qquad $\ncong$\quad|\ncong|
+
+\bugonpage 262, line 15 (11/14/86)
+
+Change\qquad $\eth$\quad|\thorn|\qquad to\qquad $\eth$\quad|\eth|
+
+\bugonpage 264, line 1 (11/11/86)
+
+\centerline{\bf Appendix G: $\{$\TeX\ Users$\}$}
+
+\bugonpage 265, line 6 (11/11/86)
+
+\line{you might want to look back at Appendix G\null.
+  Perhaps someone in TUG has}
+
+\bugonpage 275, column 1 (11/14/86)
+
+Add entry\newline
+|\eth| ($\eth$),\quad 262
+
+\bugonpage 279, column 1 (12/12/89)
+
+\noindent
+|\lesssim| ($\lesssim$),\quad 260
+
+\bugonpage 281, column 1 (6/22/86)
+
+Remove entry for\quad |\napprox|
+
+Add entry\newline
+|\ncong| ($\ncong$),\quad 261
+
+\bugonpage 284, column 1 (12/12/89)
+
+\noindent
+|\Psi| ($\Psi$),\quad 255
+
+\bugonpage 288, column 2 (11/14/86)
+
+Delete entry for\quad |\thorn|
+
+\enddocument
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/joyerr2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/joyerr2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8e1881980ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/base/joyerr2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,319 @@
+%% @texfile{
+%%   filename  = "joyerr2.tex",
+%%   version   = "1.01",
+%%   date      = "2001/08/05",
+%%   time      = "17:03:46 EDT",
+%%   checksum  = "04000 319 1132 9628",
+%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%   filetype  = "AMS-TeX: user documentation",
+%%   copyright = "Copyright 2000 American Mathematical Society,
+%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%                authorized only if either:
+%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy
+%%                    including name; OR
+%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it to some
+%%                    other name.",
+%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%                Technical Support,
+%%                Electronic Products and Services,
+%%                P. O. Box 6248,
+%%                Providence, RI 02940,
+%%                USA",
+%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%   keywords  = "amstex, ams-tex, tex",
+%%   abstract  = "This file contains errata to The Joy of TeX,
+%%                second edition, 1990. It must be run with AMSTEX
+%%                and AMSPPT 2.0+; it is incompatible with previous
+%%                versions. It also requires the file amssym.tex and
+%%                the fonts msam10 and msbm10.",
+%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 checksum
+%%                as the first value, followed by the equivalent of
+%%                the standard UNIX wc (word count) utility output of
+%%                lines, words, and characters.  This is produced by
+%%                Robert Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%% }
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\input amstex
+\documentstyle{amsppt}
+
+\define\lastupdate{5 August 2001}
+
+\pagewidth{29pc}
+\raggedbottom
+\tenpoint
+
+%  \ninepoint required for diversions; sidetrip symbol not available.
+%  Substitute 7pt for \scriptfont, usually 6pt; not really needed
+\catcode`\@=11
+\font@\ninerm=cmr10 at 9pt
+\font@\ninei=cmmi10 at 9pt
+\font@\ninesy=cmsy10 at 9pt
+\font@\nineit=cmti10 at 9pt
+\font@\ninesl=cmsl10 at 9pt
+\font@\ninebf=cmbx10 at 9pt
+\font@\ninett=cmtt10 at 9pt
+\def\ninepoint{\normalbaselineskip12pt
+ \def\rm{\fam0\ninerm}%
+ \def\it{\fam\itfam\nineit}%
+ \def\sl{\fam\slfam\ninesl}%
+ \def\bf{\fam\bffam\ninebf}%
+ \def\tt{\ninett}%
+ \def\smc{\tensmc}%
+ \textfont0=\ninerm   \scriptfont0=\sevenrm   \scriptscriptfont0=\fiverm
+ \textfont1=\ninei    \scriptfont1=\seveni    \scriptscriptfont1=\fivei
+ \textfont2=\ninesy   \scriptfont2=\sevensy   \scriptscriptfont2=\fivesy
+ \textfont3=\tenex   \scriptfont3=\tenex     \scriptscriptfont3=\tenex
+ \textfont\itfam=\nineit
+ \textfont\slfam=\ninesl
+ \textfont\bffam=\ninebf \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf
+   \scriptscriptfont\bffam=\fivebf
+ \tt\ttglue=.45em  minus .135em
+ \setbox\strutbox=\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt}%
+ \normalbaselines\rm}
+
+\def\JoT{{\sl The Joy of \TeX}}
+
+%  Support verbatim listing of TeX source, as defined in TeXbook, p. 421;
+%  lifted from MANMAC.TEX, and modified slightly for narrower columns.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\chardef\other=12
+\def\ttverbatim{\begingroup \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other \catcode`\#=\other \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \obeyspaces \obeylines \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tt}
+
+\newskip\ttglue
+{\tenpoint\tt \global\ttglue=.5em plus .25em minus .15em}
+% this should be installed in each font
+
+%  From David Eppstein's ``Trees'' paper (TUGboat 6#1), preserve initial
+%  spaces.
+{\obeyspaces\gdef {\ifvmode\indent\fi\space}}
+
+%  Permissible overhang beyond right margin.
+\newdimen\ttrightskip
+\ttrightskip=5pc
+
+%  Although | is ordinarily an escape character within verbatim mode,
+%  provide a method for letting it instead be the character itself
+%  within a display verbatim listing, as needed; this is based on
+%  a technique developed by Michael Ferguson.  Note that within one
+%  \begintt...\endtt block, | can be only one of:
+%       the printing | character, or
+%       active (the escape character)
+%  It cannot perform both functions at the same time.
+\newif\ifttVertChar     \ttVertCharfalse
+{\catcode`\|=\active \gdef\VertChar{\def|{\char"7C }}}
+
+%  Other non-tt elements that may be embedded within \begintt...\endtt .
+\def\MTH{$}
+\def\sb{_}
+\def\sp{^}
+\def\SP{{\tt\char"20 }}         % "visible" space
+\chardef\bs=`\\
+\def\vrt{{\tt\char`\|}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+{\obeylines \gdef\activatettbar{\global\catcode`\|=\active %
+  \gdef|{\ttverbatim \spaceskip\ttglue \xspaceskip\ttglue %
+         \let^^M=\  \let|=\endgroup}}}
+\activatettbar
+
+\catcode`\@=13
+
+\def\ttindent{\noindent\kern3\parindent\hangindent3\parindent}
+
+%  This definition is stolen from the file of TeXbook errata.
+\def\bugonpage#1(#2) \par{\bigbreak\tenpoint
+  \hrule width\hsize
+  \line{\lower3.5pt\vbox to13pt{}Page #1\hfil(#2)}\hrule width\hsize
+  \nobreak\medskip}
+
+%  Some definitions for setting particular Joy notation.
+\def\CR{$\langle$carriage-return$\rangle$}
+\def\tab{{\smc tab}}
+
+\NoBlackBoxes
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\topmatter
+\title Errata to \JoT, second edition,\linebreak
+  for \AmSTeX{} 2.0\endtitle
+\leftheadtext{Errata to \JoT, second edition, for \AmSTeX{} 2.0}
+\rightheadtext{Errata to \JoT, second edition, for \AmSTeX{} 2.0}
+\endtopmatter
+
+\document
+
+\noindent
+This list of corrections to \JoT, second edition, 1990, includes all known
+corrections to that edition.  Corrections for the previous edition, which
+preceded the release of \AmSTeX{} Version 2.0, can be found in the file
+|joterr.tex|.
+
+The printing date of each copy of \JoT\ is identified on the reverse
+of the title page.  No corrections have been made in any reprint of
+\JoT, second edition, since the initial printing in 1990.
+
+\smallskip
+(This errata list was last updated \lastupdate.)
+
+
+\bugonpage xviii, line 16 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent
+[{\sl change $d0$ at end of line to $d\theta$.}]
+
+\bugonpage xx, line 14 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent
+[{\sl change $d0$ at end of line to $d\theta$.}]
+
+\bugonpage 19, lines $-9$ to $-7$ (1997/06/07)
+
+\begingroup
+\hsize27.5pc
+\leftskip1.5pc
+\noindent
+sensation, particularly the material that he has expounded on pages\linebreak
+22--23. Including this material cost an extra \$1000, but it did make
+\P\P\linebreak
+1 and 2 quite popular
+\endgroup
+
+\bugonpage 23, lines 24--26 (1997/06/07)
+
+\begingroup
+\hsize=30.15pc
+\BlackBoxes
+\indent The head of the department, our university's own I. M. Stable,
+  attributes Treemu\-nch's recent aberrant behavior to the much-publicized
+  ``research'' for his paper; notwithstanding, others say that Treemunch's
+  name isn't on the computers' databases,
+\par
+\endgroup
+
+\bugonpage 24, line 17 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent\kern1.5pc
+\line{notwithstanding, others say that Treemunch's name isn't on
+  the computers'}
+
+\bugonpage 24, line $-13$ (1997/06/07)
+
+\ttindent
+|the computers'\linebreak databases ...|
+
+\bugonpage 33, line 9 (1997/06/07)
+
+\line{\indent Ties are often preferable to |\.|\ after abbreviations.
+For example, it is best}
+
+\bugonpage 97, lines 7--8 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent
+some other kind of tag. Some journals place these tags to the left of
+the formula:
+
+\bugonpage 129, line 13 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent\kern-1.5pc
+{\bf ACCENTS IN MATH MODE}
+
+\bugonpage 137, line 12 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent\kern-1.5pc
+{\bf ARROWS}
+
+\bugonpage 163, line 16 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent\kern-1.5pc
+{\bf GREEK LETTERS}
+
+\bugonpage 163, line 21 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent\kern-1.5pc
+{\bf HORIZONTAL BRACES}
+
+\bugonpage 175, line $-13$ (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent
+|amsppt| style, you still must type |\loadmsam| and |\loadmsbm| but you can
+
+\bugonpage 182, line 20 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent\kern-1.5pc
+{\bf RUNNING HEADS}
+
+\bugonpage 183, lines $-3$ to $-2$ (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent
+the |\bigl| and |\bigr| for the delimiters (see {\bf big and bigg})
+should be accompanied by a |\bigm|{\tt\char`\|} for the $\vert$:
+
+\bugonpage 194, lines $-4$ to $-3$ (1997/06/07)
+
+\begingroup
+\NoBlackBoxes
+\ninepoint
+\leftskip18pt
+\noindent
+\AmSTeX\ also takes care to disregard extraneous spaces in constructions
+like \hbox{|\author|} and |\title|.  Although we typed\par
+\endgroup
+
+\bugonpage 201, line $-11$ (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent
+\line{tuation, the |amsppt| preprint style provides a command |\rom| to
+be applied}
+
+\bugonpage 244, lines $-3$ to $-1$ (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent
+When you leave out the |&|, \TeX\ simply inserts a blank for the right
+hand part of the second formula, so the whole second formula was treated
+as the left hand part, with the right hand part being blank.
+
+\bugonpage 291, column 2 (1999/01/07)
+
+Add entry\newline
+empty delimiter (|\left.|, |\right.|), 85, 144
+
+\bugonpage 293, column 2, index entry ``formulas'' (1996/11/23)
+
+Add second level entry\newline
+\indent{\it see also\/} tags
+
+\bugonpage 298, column 1 (1997/06/07)
+
+\noindent
+margin gap in |\multline|, 175
+
+\bugonpage 298, column 1, index entry ``math formulas'' (1997/06/07)
+
+Add second level entry\newline
+\indent|\tag|, 97
+
+\bugonpage 293, column 2, index entry ``numbers'' (1996/11/23)
+
+Add second level entry\newline
+\indent{\it see also\/} tags
+
+\bugonpage 300, column 1, index entry ``operators'' (1997/06/07)
+
+\indent space around, 43--44, 164-165, 224
+
+\bugonpage 303, column 1, index entry ``relations'' (1997/06/07)
+
+\indent space around, 43--44, 137, 165
+
+\enddocument
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/siam/amsamp.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/siam/amsamp.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..44048937dd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/amstex/siam/amsamp.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,365 @@
+%  This is the sample paper for the AmSTeX SIAM style file, (amstex)siam.sty
+%  for use with AmSTeX version 2.1 or later and amsppt.sty, version 2.1a.
+%  RCS information: $Revision: 1.1 $, $Date: 93/01/25 15:33:19 $.
+\input amstex
+\documentstyle{amstexs1}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Macro definitions for running heads and first page              %
+\accepted\SIMAF                                                   %
+\firstpageno{10}                                                  %
+\lastpageno{12}                                                   % 
+\issuevolume{1}                                                   %
+\issuenumber{2}                                                   %
+\issuemonth{February}                                             %
+\placenumber{002}             % place of paper in this issue      %
+\issueyear{1988}                                                  %
+\shortauthor{Bradley J. Lucier and Douglas N. Arnold}             %
+\shorttitle{A Sample Paper}                                       %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Macros specific to this paper   %
+\define\loner{{L^1(\Bbb R)}}      %
+\define\linfr{{L^\infty(\Bbb R)}} %
+\define\bvr{{\roman{BV}(\Bbb R)}} %
+\define\TV{{\roman {TV}}}         %
+\define\sdot{\,\cdot\,}           %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\topmatter
+\title
+A SAMPLE PAPER, WITH A RATHER LONG TITLE, TO ILLUSTRATE THE 
+\AmSTeX\ SIAM STYLE\footnote[\boldkey*]{Unlikely to appear.}
+\endtitle
+\author
+BRADLEY J. LUCIER\footnote[\dag]{Department of Mathematics, Purdue University,
+West Lafayette, Indiana 47907.  Present address, somewhere on the beach
+(lucier\@math.purdue.edu).
+The work of the first author was not supported by the
+Wolf Foundation.}\ and DOUGLAS N. ARNOLD\footnote[\ddag]{Department
+of Mathematics, Pennsylvania State University,
+University Park, Pennsylvania 16802.}
+\endauthor
+\abstract
+This sample paper illustrates many of the amstex
+macros as used with the \AmSTeX\ SIAM style file amstexsiam (version 2.0a).
+The \AmSTeX\ SIAM style file, which
+inputs and builds upon the amsppt style (version 2.1a or later)
+of Michael Spivak, gives authors easy
+access to most of the typographical constructions used in SIAM journals.
+It does not address the issues of the table of contents
+or tables, which must be set using more primitive \TeX\ macros.
+\endabstract
+\keywords
+porous medium, interface curves
+\endkeywords
+\subjclass
+65N60
+\endsubjclass
+\endtopmatter
+\document
+\subhead 1. Introduction\endsubhead
+We are concerned with numerical approximations to the so-called
+porous-medium equation \cite{6},
+$$
+\alignedat2
+  &u_t=\phi(u)_{xx},&&\qquad x\in\Bbb R,\quad t>0,\quad\phi(u)=u^m,\quad m>1,
+\\
+  &u(x,0)=u_0(x),&&\qquad x\in\Bbb R.
+\endalignedat
+\tag 1.1
+$$
+We assume that the initial data $u_0(x)$ has bounded support, that
+$0\leq u_0\leq M$, and that $\phi(u_0)_x\in\bvr$.
+It is well known that a unique solution $u(x,t)$ of (1.1) exists,
+and that $u$ satisfies
+$$
+  0\leq u\leq M\text{ and }\TV\phi(u(\,\cdot\,,t))_x\leq\TV\phi(u_0)_x.
+\tag 1.2
+$$
+If the data has slightly more regularity, then this too is satisfied
+by the solution. Specifically, if $m$ is no greater than two and
+$u_0$ is Lipschitz continuous, then $u(\,\cdot\,,t)$ is also Lipschitz;
+if $m$ is greater than two and $(u_0^{m-1})_x\in\linfr$, then
+$(u(\,\cdot\,,t)^{m-1})_x\in\linfr$ 
+(see [3]). (This will follow from results presented here, also.)
+We also use the fact that the solution $u$ is H\"older continuous in $t$.
+
+\subhead 2. $\linfr$ error bounds\endsubhead
+After a simple definition, we state a theorem
+that expresses the error of approximations $u^h$ in
+terms of the weak truncation error $E$.
+\definition{Definition 2.1}\rm A {\it definition}
+is the same as a theorem set in roman
+type.  In version 2 of the \AmSTeX\ style file for the SIAM journals,
+definitions are set with their own command.
+\enddefinition
+\proclaim{Theorem 2.1}
+Let $\{u^h\}$ be a family of approximate solutions satisfying
+the following conditions for $0\leq t\leq T${\rm:}
+\roster
+\item For all $x\in\Bbb R$ and positive $t$, $0\leq u^h(x,t)\leq M${\rm;}
+\item Both $u$ and $u^h$ are H\"older--$\alpha$ in $x$
+for some $\alpha\in(0,1\wedge 1/(m-1))${\rm;} $u^h$ is right
+continuous in $t${\rm;}
+and $u^h$ is H\"older continuous in $t$ on
+strips $\Bbb R\times(t^n,t^{n+1})$, with the set $\{t^n\}$ having no
+limit points\/{\rm;} and
+\item There exists a positive function $\omega(h,\epsilon)$ such that\/{\rm:}
+whenever $\{w^\epsilon\}_{0<\epsilon\leq\epsilon_0}$ is a family of functions
+in $\bold X$ for which
+{\roster
+\item"(a)" there is a sequence of positive numbers $\epsilon$ tending
+to zero, such that for these  values of
+$\epsilon$, $\|w^\epsilon\|_\infty\leq 1/\epsilon$,
+\item"(b)" for all positive
+$\epsilon$, $\|w_x^\epsilon(\sdot,t)\|_\loner\leq 1/\epsilon^2$, and
+\item"(c)" for all $\epsilon>0$, 
+$$
+\sup\Sb
+x\in\Bbb R\\0\leq t_1,t_2\leq T\endSb
+\dfrac{|w^\epsilon(x,t_2)-w^\epsilon(x,t_1)|}{|t_2-t_1|^p}\leq 1/\epsilon^2,
+$$
+where $p$ is some number not exceeding $1$,
+\endroster}%
+then\footnote{This is an obvious ploy, but we need a footnote.}
+ $|E (u^h,w^\epsilon,T)|\leq\omega(h,\epsilon).$
+\item
+This is the fourth item in the outer roster.
+\endroster
+Then, there is a constant $C=C(m,M,T)$ such that
+$$\multline
+\|u-u^h\|_{\infty,\Bbb R\times[0,T]}\leq C\biggl[
+\sup \biggl |\int_\Bbb R(u_0(x)-u^h(x,0))  w(x,0) \,dx\biggr|\\
++\omega(h,\epsilon)+\epsilon^\alpha\biggr],\endmultline
+\tag 2.1
+$$
+where the supremum is taken over all $w\in\bold X$.
+\endproclaim
+
+\demo{Proof}
+We assume first that $Q$ is decreasing and consider the following cases:
+\case{Case\/ {\rm1:}
+$b'\geq 1/2$} We have $P(1/8)\geq\delta>0$ where $\delta$
+depends only on $d$, for otherwise by (3.7) applied to $P$ and $p=\infty$,
+$P$ could not attain the value $1$ at $x=1$.  Similarly, for
+$m=(a'+b')/2$, $Q(m)\geq\delta'>0$ for some $\delta'$ depending only on $d$
+since otherwise $Q$ cannot attain the value $1$ at $x=a'$.  Hence, for
+$\delta''=\min(\delta,\delta')$, 
+$|A(y)|\geq|m-1/8|\geq b'/4\geq\frac18\max(b',1)$ for 
+$y\in[0,\delta'']$.  On the other hand,
+$|A(y)|\leq \max(b',1)$ for all $y\in[0,1]$, so (4.2) follows for
+all $1\leq p\leq\infty$.
+\endcase
+\case{Case\/ {\rm2:}
+$b'\leq 1/2$} We have $P(3/4)\leq\delta<1$ with $\delta$
+depending only on $d$ for otherwise (3.7) applied to $1-P$ and $p=\infty$
+would show that $P$ could not attain the value $0$ at $x=0$.  It follows
+that $|A(y)|\geq 3/4-b'\geq 1/4$, $y\in[\delta,1]$, while $|A(y)|\leq 1$
+for all $y\in[0,1]$.  Hence (4.2) follows for
+all $1\leq p\leq\infty$.
+\endcase
+We consider now when $Q$ is increasing.  We can assume that $Q$ is not
+a translate of $P$, i.e\., we do not have $P(x)=Q(x+\delta)$ for some $\delta$,
+for then (4.2) follows trivially.  In what follows, $C$ and $\delta$
+depend on $d$, and $C$ may depend on $p$.  We consider the following cases:
+\case{Case\/ {\rm3:} $a'\geq 1/4$ and $b'\leq 100$}
+From (3.7) for $P$
+and $p=\infty$, it follows that $P(1/8)\geq\delta$ since otherwise $P$ cannot
+attain the value $1$ at $x=1$.  Hence $|A(y)|\geq a'-1/8\geq1/8$ on
+$[0,\delta]$.  On the other hand $|A(y)|\leq b'$ for all $y\in[0,1]$ and hence
+(4.2) follows for all $1\leq p\leq\infty$.
+\endcase
+Let $z$ be in $\bold X$. Because $E(u,\sdot,\sdot)\equiv0$,
+Equation (1.5) implies that
+$$
+\int_\Bbb R\Delta uz|^T_0dx=\int_0^T\int_\Bbb R
+\Delta u(z_t+\phi[u,u^h]z_{xx})\,dx\,dt-
+E(u^h,z,t),
+\tag 2.2
+$$
+where $\Delta u=u-u^h$ and 
+$$
+\phi[u,u^h]=\dfrac{\phi(u)-\phi(u^h)}{u-u^h}.
+$$
+Extend $\phi[u,u^h](\cdot,t)=\phi[u,u^h](\cdot,0)$ for negative $t$, and
+$\phi[u,u^h](\cdot,t)=\phi[u,u^h](\cdot,T)$
+for $t>T$.
+Fix a point $x_0$ and a number $\epsilon>0$. Let $j_\epsilon$
+be a smooth function of $x$ with integral $1$ and support in 
+$[-\epsilon,\epsilon]$,
+and let $J_\delta$ be a smooth function of
+$x$ and $t$ with integral $1$ and support in 
+$[-\delta,\delta]\times[-\delta,\delta]$; $\delta$ and $\epsilon$ are
+positive numbers to be specified later.
+We choose $z=z^{\epsilon\delta}$ to satisfy
+$$
+\aligned
+  &z_t+(\delta+J_\delta*\phi[u,u^h])z_{xx}=0,\qquad x\in\Bbb R,\;0
+\leq t\leq T,\\
+  &z(x,T)=j_\epsilon(x-x_0).
+\endaligned
+\tag 2.3
+$$
+The conclusion of the theorem now follows from (2.1) and the fact that
+$$
+|j_\epsilon*\Delta u(x_0,t)-\Delta u(x_0,t)|\leq C\epsilon^\alpha,
+$$
+which follows from  Assumption 2.
+\qquad\qed
+\enddemo
+\example{Example\/ {\rm 1}}  This is an example of an example.
+\endexample
+\remark{Remark\/ {\rm 1}} Examples are set the same as definitions in
+some styles,
+and the same as proofs in others.  What convention does this style follow?
+\endremark
+Sometimes you want to include a figure, as in Fig.~1.
+\topinsert
+\def\Bif{{\bf if\/ }}\def\Bwhile{{\bf while\/ }}\def\Belse{{\bf else\/ }}
+\settabs\+\qquad&\qquad&\qquad&\qquad&\cr
+\+\smc Tree Partition Algorithm \{\cr
+\+&Let stack size denote the number of nodes in the\cr
+\+&&subtrees stored temporarily on the local stack\cr
+\+&pop I from global stack\cr
+\+&set stack size := 0\cr
+\+&\Bwhile (stack size $\leq$ max size and stack size + 
+I$\rightarrow$tree size $>$ 3 (max size)) \{\cr
+\+&&process I as an interior node\cr
+\+&&let min tree be the smaller of the subtrees of the two children of I\cr
+\+&&let max tree be the larger of the subtrees of the two children of I\cr
+\+&&\Bif (min tree$\rightarrow$tree size + stack size $>$ 3 (max size)) \{\cr
+\+&&&push min tree onto the global stack\cr
+\+&&\} \Belse \{\cr
+\+&&&push min tree onto the local stack\cr
+\+&&&set stack size := stack size + min tree$\rightarrow$tree size\cr
+\+&&\}\cr
+\+&&set I := max tree\cr
+\+&\}\cr
+\+&\Bif (I$\rightarrow$tree size + stack size $>$ 3 (max size)) \{\cr
+\+&&push I onto the global stack\cr
+\+&\} \Belse \{\cr
+\+&&push I onto the local stack\cr
+\+&\}\cr
+\+&Process all subtrees on the local stack\cr
+\+\}\cr
+\botcaption{Fig.~1}  Tree partition algorithm Tree partition algorithm
+Tree partition algorithm Tree partition algorithm Tree partition algorithm
+Tree partition algorithm Tree partition algorithm.\endcaption
+\endinsert
+
+We finish with a table of all SIAM journals.
+\midinsert
+\topcaption{Table 1}{SIAM journal acronyms and titles}\endcaption
+\settabs\+\indent&Acronym\indent&Title&\cr
+\hbox to \hsize{\hrulefill}
+\+&Acronym&Title&\cr
+\hbox to \hsize{\hrulefill}
+\+&SINUM&SIAM Journal on Numerical Analysis&\cr
+\+&SIREV&SIAM Review&\cr
+\+&SIMA&SIAM Journal on Mathematical Analysis&\cr
+\+&SIMAX&SIAM Journal on Matrix Analysis and Applications&\cr
+\+&SICOMP&SIAM Journal on Computing&\cr
+\+&SISC&SIAM Journal on Scientific Computing&\cr
+\+&SIOPT&SIAM Journal on Optimization&\cr
+\+&SIAP&SIAM Journal on Applied Mathematics&\cr
+\+&SICON&SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization&\cr
+\+&SIDMA&SIAM Journal on Discrete Mathematics&\cr
+\+&TVP&Theory of Probability and Its Applications&\cr
+\hbox to \hsize{\hrulefill}
+\endinsert
+
+\Refs
+\ref
+  \no 1
+  \by L. A. Caffarelli and A. Friedman
+  \paper Regularity of the free boundary of a gas flow in an 
+         $n$-dimensional porous medium
+  \jour Indiana Math. J.
+  \vol 29
+  \yr 1980
+  \pages 361--391
+\endref
+\ref\no 2
+  \by R. DeVore and B. Lucier
+  \paper High order regularity for solutions of the inviscid Burgers equation
+  \inbook Nonlinear Hyperbolic Problems
+\procinfo Proceedings of an Advanced Research Workshop, Bordeaux,
+France, June 1988
+  \bookinfo Lecture Notes in Mathematics
+  \vol 1402
+  \eds C. Carasso, P. Charrier, B. Hanouzet, and J.-L. Joly 
+  \yr 1989
+  \publ Springer-Verlag
+  \publaddr New York
+  \pages 147--154
+\endref
+\ref \no 3
+  \bysame
+  \paper Wavelets
+  \jour Acta Numerica
+  \yr 1992
+  \ed A. Iserles
+  \publ Cambridge University Press
+  \publaddr New York
+  \pages 1--56
+\endref
+\ref \no 4
+  \by R. A. DeVore and V. A. Popov
+  \paper Interpolation spaces and non-linear approximation
+  \inbook Function Spaces and Applications
+  \bookinfo Lecture Notes in Mathematics
+  \procinfo Proceedings of the US--Swedish Seminar held in Lund, 
+Sweden, June 15--21, 1986
+  \vol 1302
+  \eds M. Cwikel, J. Peetre, Y. Sagher, and H. Wallin
+  \publ Springer-Verlag
+  \publaddr New York
+  \yr 1988
+  \pages 191--205
+  \endref
+\ref \no 5
+  \by R. A. DeVore and X. M. Yu
+  \paper Nonlinear $n$-widths in Besov spaces
+  \inbook Approximation Theory VI: Vol. 1
+  \eds C. K. Chui, L. L. Schumaker, and J. D. Ward
+  \publ Academic Press
+  \publaddr New York
+  \yr 1989
+  \pages 203--206
+  \lang In Russian
+  \endref
+\ref 
+  \no 6
+  \by K. Hollig and M. Pilant
+  \paper Regularity of the free boundary for the porous medium equation
+  \paperinfo MRC Tech. Rep. 2742
+\endref
+\ref 
+  \no 7
+  \by J. Jerome
+  \book Approximation of Nonlinear Evolution Systems 
+  \publ Academic Press 
+  \publaddr New York 
+  \yr 1983
+\endref
+\ref
+  \no 8
+  \manyby R. J. LeVeque
+  \paper Convergence of a large time step generalization of Godunov's method 
+         for conservation laws
+  \jour Comm. Pure Appl. Math.
+  \vol 37 
+  \yr 1984
+  \pages 463--478
+\endref
+\ref\no 9
+  \by O. Rioul and M. Vetterli
+  \paper Wavelets and signal processing
+  \jour IEEE Signal Processing Magazine
+  \vol 8
+  \issue 4
+  \yr 1991
+  \toappear
+\endref
+\endRefs
+\enddocument
+